Addressing Guide - Support

Spectrum Technology Platform
™
Version 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
Notices
Copyright
© 2018 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved. MapInfo and Group 1 Software are trademarks
of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All other marks and trademarks are property of their respective
holders.
USPS® Notices
Pitney Bowes Inc. holds a non-exclusive license to publish and sell ZIP + 4® databases on optical
and magnetic media. The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service:
Link
CASS, CASS Certified, DPV, eLOT, FASTforward, First-Class Mail, Intelligent Mail, LACS ,
Link
Link
NCOA , PAVE, PLANET Code, Postal Service, POSTNET, Post Office, RDI, Suite
, United
States Postal Service, Standard Mail, United States Post Office, USPS, ZIP Code, and ZIP + 4.
This list is not exhaustive of the trademarks belonging to the Postal Service.
Link®
Pitney Bowes Inc. is a non-exclusive licensee of USPS® for NCOA
processing.
Prices for Pitney Bowes Software's products, options, and services are not established, controlled,
or approved by USPS® or United States Government. When utilizing RDI™ data to determine
parcel-shipping costs, the business decision on which parcel delivery company to use is not made
by the USPS® or United States Government.
Data Provider and Related Notices
Data Products contained on this media and used within Pitney Bowes Software applications are
protected by various trademarks and by one or more of the following copyrights:
©
Copyright United States Postal Service. All rights reserved.
©
2014 TomTom. All rights reserved. TomTom and the TomTom logo are registered trademarks of
TomTom N.V.
©
2016 HERE
Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)
Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.
©
Copyright United States Census Bureau
©
Copyright Nova Marketing Group, Inc.
Portions of this program are © Copyright 1993-2007 by Nova Marketing Group Inc. All Rights
Reserved
©
Copyright Second Decimal, LLC
©
Copyright Canada Post Corporation
This CD-ROM contains data from a compilation in which Canada Post Corporation is the copyright
owner.
©
2007 Claritas, Inc.
The Geocode Address World data set contains data licensed from the GeoNames Project
(www.geonames.org) provided under the Creative Commons Attribution License ("Attribution
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
3
Copyright
License") located at http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/legalcode. Your use of the
GeoNames data (described in the Spectrum™ Technology Platform User Manual) is governed by
the terms of the Attribution License, and any conflict between your agreement with Pitney Bowes
Software, Inc. and the Attribution License will be resolved in favor of the Attribution License solely
as it relates to your use of the GeoNames data.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
4
Table of Contents
1 - Getting Started
Introduction to Address Quality
7
2 - Addressing Concepts
U.S. Addressing Concepts
Canadian Addressing Concepts
Australian Addressing
International Addressing
9
14
17
17
3 - Validating Addresses
Validating US Addresses
Validating Canadian Addresses
19
19
4 - Stages Reference
Address Now Module
Global Addressing Module
Universal Addressing Module
21
61
100
Chapter : Appendix
Appendix A:
ISO Country Codes and Module Support 283
1 - Getting Started
In this section
Introduction to Address Quality
7
Getting Started
Introduction to Address Quality
The Addressing Solution ensures quality addressing by providing tools that verify and standardize
addresses in over 220 countries. Spectrum™ Technology Platform supports address quality initiatives
by adhering to postal guidelines, which enables the timely delivery of mail at a discounted rate.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
7
2 - Addressing
Concepts
In this section
U.S. Addressing Concepts
Canadian Addressing Concepts
Australian Addressing
International Addressing
9
14
17
17
Addressing Concepts
U.S. Addressing Concepts
The USPS has established guidelines for what it calls quality addressing. Quality addressing ensures
standardized addresses to help the USPS provide timely mail delivery. This goal becomes even
more critical as mailers attempt to qualify for postal discounts based on ZIP Codes, ZIP + 4 Codes,
and others. A standardized address is an address that has been matched against the U.S. Postal
Database and formatted based on USPS addressing conventions.
A U.S. address can be a street address, a rural route address, a highway contract address, a P.O.
box address, or a private mailbox address.
A street address contains these elements:
4235
N
House Number Leading
Directional
MAIN
ST
NW
APT
100
Street
Name
Suffix
Trailing Directional Apartment Label Apartment
Number
A rural route, highway contract, or P.O. box address has these elements:
RR
123
BOX
Rural Route or Highway Contract Rural Route or Highway
Type
Contract Number
19
Rural Route, Highway
Contract, or PO Box
Number
A private mailbox address contains these elements:
PMB
345
Private Mailbox Type
Private Mailbox Number
Address elements and city/state/ZIP Code information combine to make address lines. These lines
are defined as shown in the figure below:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
9
Addressing Concepts
For complete information on U.S. address standards, see the U.S. Postal Service® (USPS®)
publication Postal Addressing Standards, USPS Publication 28, available on the USPS website.
Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS)
The Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS™) is a United States Postal Service® (USPS®) program
that certifies the accuracy of address validation software. To qualify for certain postal discounts you
must use software that is CASS Certified™ to assign ZIP Code™, ZIP + 4® codes, and delivery point
barcodes to mail.
Makers of address validation software must pass a test designed by the USPS in order to have their
software designated as CASS Certified™. CASS Certified™ software must pass tests of accuracy in
the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Five-digit coding
ZIP + 4®/delivery point (DP) coding
Carrier route coding
Delivery Point Validation (DPV®)
Link
Locatable Address Conversion System (LACS ®)
Enhanced Line of Travel (eLOT®)
Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI™)
When you use a CASS Certified™ product, you are assured of the following minimum levels of
accuracy:
Table 1: CASS Certification Levels
Certification Level
Required Accuracy Level
ZIP
98.5%
Carrier Route
98.5%
ZIP+4
98.5%
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
10
Addressing Concepts
Certification Level
Required Accuracy Level
Delivery Point Barcode
100%
eLOT
100%
Perfect Addresses
100%
Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA)
A Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) is a private company that rents out mailboxes. A
CMRA, also known as a mail drop, typically operates as a Private Mail Box Operator. Addresses at
a CMRA are therefore given the designation "PMB" (private mail box) instead of "POB" (Post Office
box).
A customer of a CMRA can receive mail and other deliveries at the street address of the CMRA
rather than the customer's own street address. Depending on the agreement between the customer
and the CMRA, the CMRA can forward the mail to the customer or hold it for pickup.
A customer may wish to use the services of a CMRA for privacy. For example, a person running a
home-based business may not wish to divulge the home address. Alternatively, a customer in one
community may contract with a CMRA in another community with a better known or more prestigious
address.
Delivery Point Validation
Delivery Point Validation (DPV®) is a United States Postal Service® (USPS®) technology that validates
the accuracy of address information down to the individual mailing address. By using DPV® to
validate addresses, you can reduce undeliverable-as-addressed (UAA) mail, thereby reducing
postage costs and other business costs associated with inaccurate address information.
Note: DPV® is only available for U.S. addresses.
Without DPV®, the address validation process only verifies that an individual address is within a
range of valid addresses for the given street. For example, the USPS data indicates that the range
of addresses on Maple Lane is 500 to 1000. You attempt to validate an address of 610 Maple Ln.
Without DPV®, this address would appear to be valid because it is in the range of 500 to 1000.
However, in reality the address 610 Maple Ln does not exist: the house numbers in this section of
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
11
Addressing Concepts
the street are 608, 609, 613, and 616. With DPV® processing, you would be alerted to the fact that
610 Maple Ln does not exist and you could take action to correct the address.
DPV® also provides unique address attributes to help produce more targeted mailing lists. For
example, DPV® can indicate if a location is vacant and can identify commercial mail receiving
agencies (CMRAs) and private mail boxes.
Although DPV® can validate the accuracy of an existing address, you cannot use DPV® to create
address lists. For example, you can validate that 123 Elm Street Apartment 6 exists, but you cannot
ask if there is an Apartment 7 at the same street address. To prevent the generation of address
lists, the DPV® database contains false positive records. False positive records are artificially
manufactured addresses that reside in a false positive table. For each negative response that occurs
in a DPV® query, a query is made to the false positive table. A match to this table will stop DPV®
processing.
Early Warning System (EWS)
The Early Warning System (EWS) provides up-to-date address information for new and recently
changed addresses that have not yet been updated in the monthly USPS database. EWS prevents
address records from miscoding due to a delay in postal data reaching the USPS® databases.
The older the U.S. Postal Database, the higher potential you have for miscoding addresses. When
a valid address is miscoded because the address it matches to in the U.S. Postal Database is
inexact, it will result in a broken address.
EWS data consists of partial address information limited to the ZIP Code™, street name, predirectional,
postdirectional, and a suffix. For an address record to be EWS-eligible, it must be an address not
present on the most recent monthly production U.S. Postal Database.
The USPS® refreshes the EWS file on a weekly basis. You can download the EWS file from the
USPS® website at https://ribbs.usps.gov/cassmass/documents/tech_guides/.
Enhanced Line of Travel (eLot)
eLOT ensures that Enhanced Carrier Route mailings are sorted as close as possible to the actual
delivery sequence. eLOT sequence is not an exact walk sequence but a sequence of ZIP + 4®
Codes arranged in the order that the route is served by a carrier. First the ZIP + 4® groups are
sequenced. Then the addresses within each group are identified as being in ascending or descending
order.
eLOT can be used by mailers who prepare carrier route mailings other than high-density/125-piece
or saturation mailings. eLOT sequencing is required for Basic Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail except automation-compatible, letter-size pieces.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
12
Addressing Concepts
Note: You must install the U.S. Postal database and eLOT database from the same month
(i.e., September eLOT data must be processed with a September U.S. Postal database). If
the U.S. Postal database and the eLOT database are not from the same month, there may
be ZIP + 4® Codes for which eLOT numbers cannot be assigned. The ZIP Code™, ZIP + 4®
Code, carrier route code, and the delivery point of an address must be provided to assign a
eLOT code.
Locatable Address Conversion System (LACS)
The USPS® Locatable Address Conversion System (LACS) corrects addresses that have changed
as a result of a rural route address converting to street-style address, a PO Box renumbering, or a
Link
street-style address changing. The following are examples of LACS
conversions:
• Rural Route Converted to Street-Style Address: Old Address: RR 3 Box 45 New Address: 1292
North Ridgeland Drive
• Street Renamed and Renumbered: Old Address: 23 Main Street New Address: 45 West First
Avenue
• PO Box Renumbered: Old Address: PO Box 453 New Address: PO Box 10435
Link
LACS
is required for CASS processing.
Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI)
For U.S. addresses only, Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI™) processing can help you determine
the best cost for shipping your packages. RDI™ processing identifies whether an address is a
business or a residential address. This difference is important because some delivery services
charge a higher price for delivery to a residential address than they do to a business address.
Street Name Aliases
Street name aliases in the United States are alternative names given to sections of a street. There
are four types of street name aliases:
• Preferred—A preferred alias is the street name preferred locally. It typically applies only to a
specific range of addresses on the street.
• Abbreviated—An abbreviated alias is a variation of the street name that can be used in cases
where the length of AddressLine1 is longer than 31 characters. For example, the street name
1234 BERKSHIRE VALLEY RD APT 312A could be abbreviated to 1234 BERKSHIRE VLLY RD
APT 312A.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
13
Addressing Concepts
• Changed—There has been an official street name change and the alias reflects the new name.
For example if SHINGLE BROOK RD is changed to CANNING DR, then CANNING DR would be
a changed alias type.
• Other—The street alias is made up of other names for the street or common abbreviations of the
street.
The non-alias version of the street name is called the base street name.
Link
Suite
Link
Suite
corrects secondary address information for U.S. business addresses whose secondary
Link
address information could not be validated. If Suite
processing is enabled, the firm name is
matched to a database of known firm names and their secondary address information.
For example,
Firm Name: Pitney Bowes
Address Line 1: 4200 Parliament Place
Address Line 2: STE 1
Postal Code: 20706
Link
In this case, Suite
processing would change the suite number to the correct suite number:
Firm Name: Pitney Bowes
Address Line 1: 4200 Parliament Place
Address Line 2: STE 600
Postal Code: 20706-1844
Canadian Addressing Concepts
Canada Post Corporation (CPC) collects, processes, and delivers mail across the second-largest
geographic area in the world (second only to the area covered by the former Soviet Union). To
ensure that each piece of mail arrives at its destination promptly, CPC has developed address-labeling
standards to facilitate mail processing and timely delivery.
The CPC requires that all mail items must contain the following address components for delivery of
the mail piece:
•
•
•
•
Addressee
Delivery address
Community/municipality
Provinces
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
14
Addressing Concepts
• Postal code
Your mail is most efficiently processed when it follows the optimum address format, which uses
symbols, capital letters, and no delimiters (such as commas or periods). The CPC addressing
conventions include guidelines for format, punctuation, and address components.
Address Format
Canada Post defines a mailing address as the information required to identify a point of call and/or
delivery point. The CPC sequence of components of an address block for mail originating in and
addressed to a destination within Canada is:
1. Non-address data and addressee information
2. Delivery address information
3. Municipality, province, postal code.
Canadian addresses should follow these guidelines:
•
•
•
•
Use the symbol for an address element rather than the full name.
Use upper-case letters on all lines of the address block.
Do not use the number sign (#) or the French equivalent (nº) in an address.
Do not use punctuation, such as a comma, as a delimiter between address elements or components
unless otherwise noted.
• Format all lines of the address with a flush-left margin.
• The bottom three lines of the address block must be: Addressee information, delivery address
information, municipality, province, and postal code.
Non-Address Data
If there is any data that is extraneous, such as "Attention" or "Address Correction Required," this
type of non-address data must always appear above the top line of the address block, above the
delivery address information line.
Non-address data includes any additional information a mailer wishes to put on the mail piece. This
includes words such as "Attention" and "Confidential" or account numbers and customer identification
numbers.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
15
Addressing Concepts
Addressee Information
Addressee information identifies the intended person(s), firm, or establishment to which the piece
of mail is addressed. Addressee information, with multiple lines of information, may include the
following elements in the listed order:
•
•
•
•
Name or in-care-of information
Title
Department or division name
Company or establishment name.
The above order also applies for Large Volume Receivers (LVRs) and government departments or
agencies. For departments with branches, branch names appear above the department name.
Delivery Address Information: Civic Address
Civic addressing generally applies to customers who receive door-to-door delivery or who receive
their mail at a community mail box or "superbox." Unless otherwise noted, address components
and elements on the same line should be separated from each other by one space.
Civic addresses may include the following elements:
• Civic Number—The official number that has been assigned to that address by the municipality.
• Civic Number Suffix—An alpha character or fraction appearing after the civic number that must
be included in the address, such as 11D JESSOME ST, or 91 1/2 KING ST.
• Street Name—The official street name as it is recognized by the municipality, with no translation.
If the street name is a number followed by an ordinal such as "ST", "ND", "TH", or "E", as in "1ST",
"2ND", "3RD", "4TH" or "1E", "2E," there will be no space between the number and the ordinal. If
the street name is alphanumeric, there will be no space between the numeric and the alpha portion
(14B ST instead of 14 B ST).
• Street Type—When an address is presented in English, the street type always follows the street
name. When an address is presented in French, the street type appears before the street name
(RUE RENE-LEVESQUE) unless the street name is an ordinal. In this case, the street type follows
the street name (2061 36E RUE). The street type is always identified by CPC symbols.
• Street Direction—Where required, it should be identified by a one- or two-character symbol (such
as N, S, NE, NW, O, NO) and located as the last element of street information.
• Unit Designator—The unit designator identifies the specific unit as assigned by the building. The
value can be alpha, alphanumeric, or numeric. Where the unit identifier is a number, it is presented
in numeric format ("2" instead of the word two). If the unit designator is not used in the address,
the unit designator is placed before the street information separated by a hyphen (317-10228 148
ST). Valid examples for placement of the unit designator include: 1 MAIN ST APT 1 or APT 1 1
MAIN ST or 1-1 MAIN ST.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
16
Addressing Concepts
Delivery Address Information: Non-Civic Address
Non-civic addresses are used when the service provided to a customer is a lock box, general delivery,
or route service where civic address information is not available.
Mode of Delivery Information
Mode of delivery information is to be placed on the same line as delivery installation information.
Mode of delivery information may consist of the following elements:
• Mode of Delivery Designator—The official CPC symbol for Postal Box (PO BOX), Rural Route
(RR), Suburban Service (SS), Mobile Route (MR), or General Delivery (GD).
• Mode of Delivery Identifier—Numeric identifier separated from the mode of delivery designator
by one space. Do not use the number sign (#) or the French abbreviation (nº) before the mode of
delivery identifier (PO BOX 123, not PO BOX #123).
Australian Addressing
In Australia, Australia Post sets addressing standards. For a list of Australia Post publications that
describe these standards and the Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) program, visit the
Australia Post web site at www.auspost.com.au.
International Addressing
Addressing products from Pitney Bowes classify addresses outside the U.S. and Canada as
"international" addresses. The standards for international addresses vary from country to country.
Pitney Bowes has compiled these standards into an international address coding system that can
validate and correct address elements for approximately 86 countries and validate postal code
formats for 141 countries.
Information about the postal standards of Universal Postal Union member countries can be found
online at the Universal Postal Union website www.upu.int.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
17
3 - Validating
Addresses
In this section
Validating US Addresses
Validating Canadian Addresses
19
19
Validating Addresses
Validating US Addresses
The Validate Address service in Spectrum Technology Platform's Universal Addressing Module
matches input addresses to addresses in the USPS database in order to correct postal information.
It also adds additional postal information that can potentially earn you postal discounts (such as ZIP
+ 4 Codes).
During address matching and standardization, address lines are separated into components and
compared to the contents of the USPS database. Any address information not used as part of
matching is referred to as dropped address information. If a match is found, the input address is
standardized according to the contents of the database. If your data contains addresses for which
no database match is determined, you can elect to normalize input addresses. The normalization
process attempts to format the address lines according to conventions outlined in USPS Publication
28. When the normalization option is invoked and no database match is found for a particular
address, Validate Address attempts to recognize the individual elements and formats them according
to USPS conventions.
Validating Canadian Addresses
The Validate Address service in Spectrum Technology Platform's Universal Addressing Module
matches input addresses to addresses in the Canadian Postal Database in order to correct postal
information. It also adds additional postal information that can potentially earn you postal discounts.
During address validation and correction, address lines are extracted from the input record, separated
into components (parsed), and compared to the contents of the Canadian Postal. Database. If a
match is found, the input address is corrected according to the contents of the database. If no
database match is determined, Validate Address provides the option to normalize input addresses.
The normalization process attempts to format the address lines according to conventions outlined
in the Canada Post publication, Delivery Needs Accuracy: Canadian Addressing Standards. When
the normalization option is invoked and no database match is found for a particular address, Validate
Address attempts to recognize the individual elements and formats them according to Canada Post
conventions.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
19
4 - Stages Reference
In this section
Address Now Module
Global Addressing Module
Universal Addressing Module
21
61
100
Stages Reference
Address Now Module
Address Now Module
The Address Now Module is an address standardization and validation tool that provides
comprehensive coverage for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada. Address Now is one of two
address standardization and validation modules available for Spectrum™ Technology Platform. The
other module is the Universal Addressing Module. The Address Now Module provides the following
benefits over the Universal Addressing Module for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada:
• Better data—The database used by the Address Now Module is more up to date and complete
in many countries than the database used by the Universal Addressing Module. This is because
the Universal Addressing Module relies on data from Universal Postal Union (UPU), a body of the
United Nations, for its international data and while the data coverage is extensive, the updates
and the level of address details are not proactively managed by the UPU. Address Now, on the
other hand, relies on data directly from the postal authorities (in most countries), plus other
third-party data providers. This means that the data is more current with postal changes and is
more detailed.
• Drill-down feature—The Address Now Module also offers drill-down capabilities to address data
from any country, allowing users to rapidly enter address information without having to worry about
the structure or making data entry mistakes.
• Double-byte support—The Address Now Module is Unicode enabled, recognizing Kanji and
other double-byte characters.
Address Now Components
Address Now consists of the following components. These components can work with U.S., Canadian,
and international addresses.
• BuildGlobalAddresses—Allows you to interactively build an address by searching for individual
address elements.
• GetGlobalCandidateAddresses—Returns a list of addresses that are considered matches for a
given address.
• ValidateGlobalAddress—Standardizes addresses using international postal data.
ValidateGlobalAddress can also validate addresses in the U.S. and Canada but its strength is
validation of addresses in other countries. If you have a significant amount of non-U.S. and
non-Canadian address data, you should consider using ValidateGlobalAddress.
In cases where ValidateGlobalAddress returns multiple address matches for a given input address,
you can use GetGlobalCandidateAddresses to return the address stack.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
21
Stages Reference
GetGlobalCandidateAddresses is designed to return additional information from the postal databases
to help you determine which of the returned addresses is the best match.
Address Now Database
The Address Now database contains postal data from all supported countries. You can install the
entire database or the data for specific countries only. The database is installed on the server. This
database is available by subscription from Pitney Bowes and is updated monthly.
Build Global Address
Build Global Address allows you to build a valid address starting with just a single address element
or a few address elements. Build Global Address is part of the Address Now Module.
Using Build Global Address
Building an address is an interactive process that requires you to select address elements at each
step of the address building process. This means that building an address requires a sequence of
calls to Build Global Address, not a single call. To start, you make an initialization call to Build Global
Address. This call returns a session ID. You then use this session ID in subsequent calls. With each
call, Build Global Address presents a list of alternative values for an address element. You select
the value you want, then move on to the next address element until the complete address is built.
With some exceptions, you need to make a separate call for each address element.
The overall process works like this:
• First, you make an initialization call to open a session and receive a system-assigned session ID.
• Make a search call to find possible values for a given address element.
• When you have selected the value you want, you make a commit call to indicate the value you
want for the given address element.
• Continue to make search/commit calls until all address elements are committed.
• Finally, you make a close call to end the session.
To familiarize yourself with how the process works, use the Management Console's Preview tab to
step through the following procedure.
1. Open the Management Console.
2. Under the Services tab, select Address Now.
3. From the list of services on the left side of the pane, select Build Global Address.
4. On the Options tab, specify the options you want. For information on the options, see Options
on page 27.
5. Click the Preview tab.
6. In the Action field type init.
7. In the Country field enter the country of the address you want to build.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
22
Stages Reference
8. Click Run Preview.
9. In the Preview Output, find the SessionId field, highlight and right-click the value, and select
Copy from the pop-up menu.
10. In the Preview Input, highlight and right-click the SessionId field and select Paste.
11. Enter the following values in the input fields:
• Action—Type search.
• Country—Keep this field the same.
• FieldIndex—Type the index value of the first field you want to search. For example, if you
know you want to search for an address in Chicago, you would type "1" because for U.S.
addresses, field index 1 corresponds to the City field.
• SearchValue—Type the value you want to search for. For example, if you want to build an
address in Chicago, you would type "chicago".
• SessionId—Keep the same value.
Note: The values in the other input fields are ignored.
12. Click Run Preview again.
13. The results of the search are placed in up to two output fields: Alternatives.InContext and
AlternativesOutContext. For an explanation of the difference between in context results and
out of context results, see What Is Context? on page 33.
14. When you have found the value you want, enter the following values in the input fields:
• Action—Type commit.
• AlternativeIndex—Type the index number for the alternative you choose. Index values start
with 0, not 1. For example, if you search for Chicago, the alternatives returned by Build Global
Address would be indexed as follows. If you want to commit the value "CHICAGO" you would
type "0" in the AlternativeIndex field.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0—CHICAGO
1—CHICAGO HTS
2—CHICAGO PARK
3—CHICAGO RIDGE
4—EAST CHICAGO
5—NORTH CHICAGO
6—WEST CHICAGO
• AlternativeContext—Type in or out to indicate whether the index value you specified in
AlternativeIndex is for the list of alternatives in the Alternatives.InContext field or the
Alternatives.OutContext field.
• SessionId—Keep this value the same.
Note: The values in the other input fields are ignored.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
23
Stages Reference
15. Click Run Preview again. The value you specified will now be in the Field.n.Value field for the
appropriate address element.
16. Repeat the search and commit steps as often as needed until you have built the address.
17. Close the session by entering the following values in the input fields:
• Action—Type close.
• SessionId—Keep this value the same.
Note: The values in the other input fields are ignored.
Input
Table 2: Build Global Address Input
Field Name
Format
Description
String
Specifies the action to take. One of the following:
Parameter
Action
init
Initialization. This action opens a session and returns a
session ID which is required for all other actions. The init
action requires the Country input field.
search
Searches for values for a specific address element and
returns a list of alternative values for you to choose. The
search action requires the following input fields:
• FieldIndex
• SearchValue
• SessionId
commit
Assigns one of the values returned by the search action
to the field. The commit action requires the following input
fields:
• AlternativeIndex
• AlternativeContext
• SessionId
clear
Un-commits the field specified in the FieldIndex field. The
clear action requires the following input fields:
• FieldIndex
• SessionID
close
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
Ends a session. The close action requires the SessionId
input field.
24
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
String
For the commit action, indicates whether you are choosing a value from
the Alternatives.InContext field or the Alternatives.OutContext field.
This field is ignored for other actions. One of the following:
Parameter
AlternativeContext
AlternativeIndex
in
You are committing a value from the Alternatives.InContext
field. This means that the value you specify in the
AlternativeIndex input field corresponds to a value in the
Alternatives.InContext output field.
out
You are committing a value from the Alternatives.OutContext
field. This means that the value you specify in the
AlternativeIndex input field corresponds to a value in the
Alternatives.OutContext output field.
String [79] For the commit action, specifies the value you want to use in the address
you are building. For example, if you searched for a city and Build Global
Address returns a list of three cities, you would indicate the city you
want by specifying the index value for your choice. Index values for the
alternatives presented by Build Global Address are zero-based, meaning
that the first alternative has an index of 0, the second alternative has a
value of 1, and so on.
The input field is ignored for actions other than commit.
Country
String [79] For the init action, specifies the country in which you want to build an
address. Specify the country using the format you chose for input country
format (English name two-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2 code, or
three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 code). For a list of ISO codes, see
ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
This input field is ignored for actions other than init.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
25
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Parameter
FieldIndex
String [79] For the search action, specifies the address element that you want to
search on. For the clear action, specifies the address element you want
to un-commit. One of the following:
all
performs the "clear" action on all address elements.
This option applies to the "clear" action only.
<IndexNumber> Performs the action on a specific address element.
To determine the index of an address element, first
look at the Field.n.Name fields and locate the field
you want. The value n indicates the field's index. For
example, you want to look up ZIP Codes for U.S.
addresses. After the init call you see that
Field.0.Name is "Zip" indicating that the ZIP Code
has a field index of "0".
This input field is ignored for actions other than search and clear.
SearchValue
String [79] For the search action, specifies the value you want to search for. This
value must be appropriate for the field you specified in FieldIndex. For
example, if you specified the ZIP Code field in FieldIndex, then you
would enter a ZIP Code or partial ZIP Code in this field. Likewise if you
chose the city field in FieldIndex you would specify a city name or partial
city name in this field. if you leave the field blank the search will return
all values that are in context. For more information about in context and
out of context values, see What Is Context? on page 33.
This input field is ignored for actions other than search.
SessionId
String [79] Specifies the session ID you want to use for this call. To obtain a session
ID use the init action. If a session is inactive for 5 minutes it will expire
and you will need to perform a new init call to start a new session.
This field is required for all actions except init.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
26
Stages Reference
Options
Table 3: Build Global Address Options
Option
Description
Home country
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where most of the
addresses in your data are located. For example, if most of your addresses are in
Canada, specify Canada. Build Global Address uses the country you specify to
attempt validation when it cannot determine the country from the StateProvince,
PostalCode, and Country address fields.
Country format
Specifies the format to use for the country name in the output. One of the following:
English names
The country in the output in English (default).
ISO codes
The country in the output as the two-character ISO
code.
UPU codes
The country in the output as the three-character UPU
code.
Show extra address line
Specifies whether or not to include the city, state/province, and postal code in one
of the AddressLine output fields. Regardless of what you specify with this option,
the output fields City, State/Province, and PostalCode will always contain the city,
state/province, and postal code.
Insert postal code separation
character
Specifies whether or not to use separators (spaces or hyphens) in ZIP Codes or
Canadian postal codes.
For example, a ZIP + 4® Code with the separator would be 20706-1844 and without
the separator it would be 207061844. A Canadian postal code with the separator
would be P5E"1S7 and without the separator it would be P5E1S7.
Note: Spaces are used in Canadian postal codes and hyphens in U.S.
ZIP + 4® Codes.
Maximum records to return
Allows you to set the default value for this option to any value from 1 to 10000; it
has a default value of 50 records. Note that values set in Enterprise Designer override
those set in Management Console
Output
Build Global Address returns address data and return codes for each input address.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
27
Stages Reference
Address Data
Table 4: Build Global Address Output
Field Name
Format
Description
Action
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the Action input field for this
call. For more information on this input field see Input on
page 24.
AddressLine1
String [79]
The formatted first address line.
AddressLine2
String [79]
The formatted second address line.
AddressLine3
String [79]
The formatted third address line.
AddressLine4
String [79]
The formatted fourth address line.
AddressLine5
String [79]
The formatted fifth address line.
AddressLine6
String [79]
The formatted sixth address line.
AddressLine7
String [79]
The formatted seventh address line.
AddressLine8
String [79]
The formatted eighth address line.
AlternativeContext
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the AlternativeContext input
field for this call. For more information, see Input on page
24.
AlternativeIndex
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the AlternativeIndex input field
for this call. For more information on this input field see
Input on page 24.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
28
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Alternatives.InContext
String [79]
A comma-delimited list of the possible values for the field
you searched on which fit the context of fields you have
already committed. For information on context see What Is
Context? on page 33.
Alternatives.InContext.Count
String [79]
The number of "in context" results returned by your search.
For information on context see What Is Context? on page
33.
Alternatives.OutContext
String [79]
A comma-delimited list of the possible values for the field
you searched on which do not fit the context of fields you
have already committed. For information on context see
What Is Context? on page 33.
Alternatives.OutContext.Count
String [79]
The number of "out of context" results returned by your
search. For information about context, see What Is
Context? on page 33.
ApartmentLabel
String [79]
Apartment designator (such as STE or APT). For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
ApartmentNumber
String [79]
Apartment number. For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
Building
String [79]
The name of a building.
City
String [79]
The city name.
Country
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the Country input field for this
call. For more information about this input field, see Input
on page 24.
Country
String [79]
The two- or three-character ISO code, or English name of
the country. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes
and Module Support.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
29
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Department
String [79]
The name of a distinct part of anything arranged into
divisions. For example, the Finance Department in a
corporation.
Field.n.CommitFlag
String [79]
Indicates whether you have chosen a value for field n (i.e.
"committed" a value). One of the following:
Y
Yes, the value of this field has been committed.
N
No, the value of this field has not been committed.
Field.n.Index
String [79]
An index value used to refer to field n, where n is 0 though
10. For example, for U.S. addresses the index value of the
ZIP field is "0".
Field.n.Name
String [79]
The name of the address element contained in field n, where
n is 0 through 10. For example, for U.S. addresses
Field.0.Name is ZIP.
Field.n.Value
String [79]
The value that has been committed to field n, where n is 0
through 10.
This field is blank on the init call.
FieldIndex
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the FieldIndex input field for
this call. For more information on this input field see Input
on page 24.
FirmName
String [79]
The name of a company. For example:
Pitney Bowes
4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
LANHAM MD 20706-1844
USA
HouseNumber
String [79]
House number. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
30
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
POBox
String [79]
The post office box number. If the address is a rural route
address, the rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode
String [79]
The postal code. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code™.
PostalCode.AddOn
String [79]
The 4-digit add-on part of the ZIP + 4® Code. For example,
in the ZIP Code™ 60655-1844, 1844 is the 4-digit add-on.
(U.S. addresses only.)
PostalCode.Base
String [79]
The 5-digit ZIP Code™. For example 20706 (U.S. addresses
only.)
Principality
String [79]
An area within a country. For example, England, Scotland,
and Wales are principalities. This field will normally be blank.
SearchFieldIndex
String [79]
The index value of the field searched in the previous search
action.
SearchValue
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the SearchValue input field for
this call. For more information on this input field see Input
on page 24.
SessionId
String [79]
Shows the value specified in the SessionId input field for
this call. For more information on this input field see Input
on page 24.
StateProvince
String [79]
The state or province abbreviation.
StreetName
String [79]
Street name. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
StreetSuffix
String [79]
Street suffix. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
31
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
SubCity
String [79]
A district or suburb. The subcity is used in countries where
it is common to include the district or suburb within the
address. For example,
27 Crystal Way
Bradley Stoke
Bristol BS32 8GA
In this case, "Bradley Stoke" is the subcity.
SubStreet
String [79]
The second street address used to identify an address.
Substreets are used in countries where it is common to give
two street names in the address. For example,
12 The Mews
High Street
In this example, "High Street" is the substreet. Substreets
can be used to precisely identify the delivery location. In the
example, "The Mews" may be a small street that needs
another street identification to properly locate the address,
so "High Street" is included. In this case, "High Street" is
the main or known street.
USCountyName
String [79]
For U.S. addresses, the name of the county where the
address is located.
Return Codes
Table 5: Build Global Address Return Codes
Field Name
Format
Description
Status
String [79]
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
null
Success
F
Failure
32
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Status.Code
String [79]
Reason for failure, if there is one.
• SessionError
• SeverError
• CountryNotFound
Status.Description
String [79]
Description of the problem, if there is one.
Please initialize new This value will appear if
session
Status.Code=SessionError.
Null or empty action This value will appear if
Status.Code=SessionError.
Unknown action
This value will appear if
Status.Code=SessionError.
Invalid session
This value will appear if
Status.Code=SessionError.
Invalid value for
This value will appear if
Status.Code=SessionError.
Cannot Search
Committed Field
This value will appear if
Status.Code=SessionError.
Module not licensed This value will appear if
Status.Code=ServerError.
Could Not Identify
Country
This value will appear if
Status.Code=CountryNotFound
What Is Context?
When you perform a search for an address element, Build Global Address looks at the address
elements that you have already committed and splits up the values it returns based on whether or
not the returned values exist within the context of the address elements you have already committed.
For example, in the U.S. the following cities exist:
In Illinois:
•
•
•
•
•
CHICAGO
CHICAGO HTS
CHICAGO RIDGE
NORTH CHICAGO
WEST CHICAGO
In Indiana:
• EAST CHICAGO
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
33
Stages Reference
In Nevada:
• CHICAGO PARK
If you have already committed a value of "IN" (Indiana) for the state and then searched for the city
"chicago", Build Global Address would return EAST CHICAGO as an "in context" result because it
exists in Indiana, and it would return all the other matches for "chicago" as out-of-context results.
Likewise, if you committed a value of "IL" (Illinois) for the state, Build Global Address would return
EAST CHICAGO and CHICAGO PARK as out of context, and CHICAGO, CHICAGO HTS, CHICAGO
RIDGE, NORTH CHICAGO, and WEST CHICAGO as "in context."
Get Global Candidate Addresses
Get Global Candidate Addresses returns a list of addresses that are considered matches for a given
input address. If the input address matches multiple addresses in the Address Now database, the
possible matches are returned. If the input address matches only one address in the Address Now
database, no address data is returned.
Get Global Candidate Addresses is part of the Address Now Module.
Input
Get Global Candidate Addresses takes a standard address as input. All addresses use this format
no matter what country the address is from. AddressLine1 and Country are required input fields.
The other fields are optional.
Table 6: Get Global Candidate Addresses Input
Field Name
Format
AddressLine1
String [79] First address line. This is a required field.
AddressLine2
String [79] Second address line
AddressLine3
String [79] Third address line
AddressLine4
String [79] Fourth address line
AddressLine5
String [79] Fifth address line
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
34
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine6
String [79] Sixth address line
AddressLine7
String [79] Seventh address line
AddressLine8
String [79] Eighth address line
City
String [79] City name
StateProvince
String [79] State or province.
PostalCode
String [10] The postal code for the address in one of these formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Country
String
FirmName
String [79] The company or firm name.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
The country. Specify the country using the format you chose for input country format
(English name or ISO code). For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and
Module Support.
Addressing Guide
35
Stages Reference
Options
Table 7: Get Global Candidate Addresses Options
Option
Description
Home country
Specifies the default country. Specify the country that is the destination of most of
your mailpieces. For example, if most of your mailpieces are going to Canada,
specify Canada. Get Global Candidate Addresses uses the country you specify to
attempt validation when it cannot determine the country from the StateProvince,
PostalCode, and Country address fields.
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the following:
Country format
Mixed
The output in mixed case (default). For example: 123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
The output in upper case. For example: 123 MAIN ST MYTOWN
FL 12345
Specifies the format to use for the country name in the output. One of the following:
English names
The country in the output in English (default).
ISO codes
The country in the output in the two-character ISO code.
UPU codes
The country in the output in the three-character UPU
code.
Show extra address line
Specifies whether or not to include the city, state/province, and postal code in one
of the AddressLine output fields. Regardless of what you specify with this option,
the output fields City, State/Province, and PostalCode will always contain the city,
state/province, and postal code.
Insert postal code separation
character
Specifies whether or not to use separators (spaces or hyphens) in ZIP™ Codes or
Canadian postal codes.
For example, a ZIP + 4® Code with the separator would be 20706-1844 and without
the separator it would be 207061844. A Canadian postal code with the separator
would be P5E"1S7 and without the separator it would be P5E1S7.
Note: Spaces are used in Canadian postal codes and hyphens in U.S.
ZIP + 4® Codes.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
36
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Maximum records to return
The maximum number of candidate addresses to output. The default is 50. The
maximum value is 100.
Return non-validated input data
Specifies whether or not to include in the output data from the input address that
could not be validated.
Output
Get Global Candidate Addresses returns address data and return codes for each address.
Address Data
Table 8: Get Global Candidate Addresses Address Data Output
Field Name
Format
AddressLine1
String [79] The formatted first address line.
AddressLine2
String [79] The formatted second address line.
AddressLine3
String [79] The formatted third address line.
AddressLine4
String [79] The formatted fourth address line.
AddressLine5
String [79] The formatted fifth address line.
AddressLine6
String [79] The formatted sixth address line.
AddressLine7
String [79] The formatted seventh address line.
AddressLine8
String [79] The formatted eighth address line.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
37
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
ApartmentLabel
String [79] Apartment designator (such as STE or APT). For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
ApartmentNumber
String [79] Apartment number. For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
Building
String [79] The name of a building.
City
String [79] The city name.
Country
String [79] The ISO code or English name of the country. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO
Country Codes and Module Support.
Department
String [79] The name of a distinct part of anything arranged into divisions. For example, the
Finance Department in a corporation.
FirmName
String [79] The name of a company. For example:
Pitney Bowes
4200 PARLIAMENT PL
STE 600
LANHAM MD 20706-1844
USA
HouseNumber
String [79] House number. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
POBox
String [79] Post office box number. If the address is a rural route address, the rural route box
number will appear here.
PostalCode
String [79] The postal code as required by the local postal authority. For example, in the U.S.
the postal code is the ZIP Code.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
38
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
PostalCode.AddOn
String [79] For U.S. addresses, the last four digits of the ZIP + 4® Code.
PostalCode.Base
String [79] For U.S. addresses, the five-digit ZIP Code.
Principality
String [79] An area within a country. For example, England, Scotland, and Wales are
principalities. This field will normally be blank.
StateProvince
String [79] The state or province abbreviation.
StreetName
String [79] Street name. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
StreetSuffix
String [79] Street suffix. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
SubCity
String [79] A district or suburb. The subcity is used in countries where it is common to include
the district or suburb within the address. For example,
27 Crystal Way
Bradley Stoke
Bristol BS32 8GA
In this case, "Bradley Stoke" is the subcity.
SubStreet
String [79] The second street address used to identify an address. Substreets are used in
countries where it is common to give two street names in the address. For example,
12 The Mews
High Street
In this example, "High Street" is the substreet. Substreets can be used to precisely
identify the delivery location. In the example, "The Mews" may be a small street that
needs another street identification to properly locate the address, so "High Street"
is included. In this case, "High Street" is the main or known street.
USCountyName
String [79] For U.S. addresses, the name of the county where the address is located.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
39
Stages Reference
Return Codes
Table 9: Get Global Candidate Addresses Return Codes
Field Name
Format
Description
ACRCode
String [79]
The Address Correction Result (ACR) code describes what data has
been changed in each record. For information on what this code means,
see The ACR Code on page 58.
Confidence
String [79]
The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range
is from zero (0) to 100; zero indicates failure, 100 indicates a very high
level of confidence that the match results are correct.
Status
String [79]
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
String [79]
Null
Success
F
Failure
Reason for failure, if there is one.
• RequestFailed
• ServerError
• CountryNotFound
Status.Description
String [79]
Description of the problem, if there is one.
Maximum records cannot be This value will appear if
set to 0. Minimum value
Status.Code=RequestFailed.
should be 1
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Address Not Found
This value will appear if
Status.Code=RequestFailed.
Module not licensed
This value will appear if
Status.Code=ServerError.
Could Not Identify Country
This value will appear if
Status.Code=CountryNotFound.
Addressing Guide
40
Stages Reference
Reports
There is one report available with Get Global Candidate Addresses: the Get Global Candidate
Addresses Report. To create the report, in Enterprise Designer drag the Get Global Candidate
Addresses Report icon to the canvas. You do not need to draw a connector to the report.
Get Global Candidate Addresses Report
The Get Global Candidate Addresses Report contains information about the settings and number
of records processed for the job.
General Information
The top of the report shows the date of the report as well as information on these settings:
• Output Country Format—The Country format setting in effect for this job. For more information
about this setting, see Options on page 36.
• Output Text Casing—The Casing setting in effect for this job. For more information about this
setting, see Options on page 36.
• Maximum Results—The Maximum records to return setting in effect for this job. For more
information about this setting, see Options on page 36.
Input Address
This section contains statistics about the input used in the job.
• Input Record Count—The total number of input addresses for the job.
• Address Records Processed—The number of addresses for which Validate Global Address
attempted to validate.
• Total Records For Which Address Search Attempted—The number of input records for which
a search was attempted.
• Total Records Successfully Searched—The number of input addresses that returned candidates.
This is the number of input addresses that did not result in a status of "F".
• Total Unsearched Records—The number of input addresses that did not return candidates. This
is equal to the number of input addresses that resulted in a status of "F".
Output Address
This section contains statistics about the output from the job.
• Search Results Count—The total number of addresses, including candidates, that the job returned.
Validate Global Address
Validate Global Address provides enhanced address standardization and validation for addresses
outside the U.S. and Canada. Validate Global Address can also validate addresses in the U.S. and
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
41
Stages Reference
Canada but its strength is validation of addresses in other countries. If you need to validate addresses
outside the U.S. and Canada, you should consider using Validate Global Address.
Validate Global Address is part of the Address Now Module.
Input
Validate Global Address takes a standard address as input. All addresses use this format no matter
what country the address is from.
Table 10: Validate Global Address Input
Field Name
Format
AddressLine1
String [79] First address line
AddressLine2
String [79] Second address line
AddressLine3
String [79] Third address line
AddressLine4
String [79] Fourth address line
AddressLine5
String [79] Fifth address line
AddressLine6
String [79] Sixth address line
AddressLine7
String [79] Seventh address line
AddressLine8
String [79] Eighth address line
City
String [79] City name
StateProvince
String [79] State or province.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
42
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
PostalCode
String [79]: The postal code for the address. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code™.
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Country
String [79] Specify the country using the format you chose for input country format
(English name or ISO code). For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country
Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
String [79] The company or firm name.
Options
Input Data Options
Table 11: Validate Global Address Input Data Options
Option
Description
Home country
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where most of the
addresses are located. For example, if most of the addresses you process are in
Canada, specify Canada. Validate Global Address uses the home country to attempt
validation when it cannot determine the country from the StateProvince, PostalCode,
and Country address fields. For a list of valid values, see ISO Country Codes and
Module Support.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
43
Stages Reference
Output Data Options
Table 12: Validate Global Address Output Data Options
Option
Description
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the these:
Country format
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For example, 123
Main St Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example,123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Specifies the format to use for the country name in the output. One of these:
English names
The country in the output is English (default).
ISO codes
The country in the output in the two-character ISO
code.
UPU codes
The country in the output in the three-character UPU
code.
Return standardized data when no Specifies whether to return a standardized address when an address cannot be
match is found
validated. The address is formatted using the preferred address format for the
address's country. If this option is not selected, the output address component fields
(StreetName, HouseNumber, etc.) are blank when address validation fails.
Show extra address line
Specifies whether to include the city, state/province, and postal code in one of the
AddressLine output fields. Regardless of what you specify with this option, the output
fields City, State/Province, and PostalCode will always contain the city, state/province,
and postal code.
Insert postal code separation
character
Specifies whether to use a separator (spaces or hyphens) in ZIP™ Codes or Canadian
postal codes.
For example, a ZIP + 4® Code with the separator would be 20706-1844 and without
the separator it would be 207061844. A Canadian postal code with the separator
would be P5E"1S7 and without the separator it would be P5E1S7.
Note: Spaces are used in Canadian postal codes and hyphens in U.S.
ZIP + 4® Codes.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
44
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Return formatted data when no
match is found
Specifies whether to return a formatted address when an address cannot be
validated. The address is formatted using the preferred address format for the
address's country.
Enable address validation
Enables address validation. Address validation does the following:
•
•
•
•
Enable address formatting
Matches components to the relevant country's reference data
Corrects spelling errors
Adds missing components
Corrects or adds postal codes
Formats the address components into the statutory postal or custom formats.
Standardization Options
Table 13: Validate Global Address Standardization Options
Option
Description
Flag vulgar words
Specifies whether or not to mark vulgar words in the output using the format
">VulgarWord<".
Debug output
This option controls whether or not to include troubleshooting information in the
output fields Email1, Email2, URL1, and URL2.
Report vulgar words
Specifies whether or not to look for vulgar words. If this option is enabled, Validate
Global Address returns a value in the WCRCode output field to indicate the results.
Populate from address lines
These options specify which parts of the address to use to standardize an address.
Validate Global Address parses the input address lines into the components you
select.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
45
Stages Reference
Validation Options
Table 14: Validate Global Address Validation Options
Option
Description
Cautious update
This option, used in conjunction with the "Force Update", ensures that no major
changes are made to the data during processing.
Cross component match
Specifies whether or not to correct common address standardization and validation
errors by performing cross-component matching. Cross-component matching checks
for matches between data found in one field in the input data and another field in
the Address Now database.
Use reference diacritics
Specifies whether or not Validate Global Address modifies the address to match the
diacritics (accents, umlauts, etc.) in the postal database when the only changes to
the address are the diacritics .
For example, if Use reference diacritics is enabled, the following would occur:
Input City: Chalon-Sur-Saône
City in the postal database: CHALON SUR SAONE
Output City: CHALON SUR SAONE
Input City: ARTEMIVS'K
City in the postal database: ARTEMIVSK
Output City: ARTEMIVSK
If Use reference diacritics is not enabled, the following would occur:
Input City: Chalon-Sur-Saône
Reference City: CHALON SUR SAONE
Output City: Chalon-Sur-Saône
Input City: ARTEMIVS'K
Reference City: ARTEMIVSK
Output City: ARTEMIVS'K
Note that this option has no effect on the Transliteration option.
Keep standardization changes in
ACR code
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies whether or not standardization changes such as changing "ROAD" to "RD"
should be reported in the ACR code.
Addressing Guide
46
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Acceptance level
The Acceptance Level setting specifies the minimum number of address components
that must be validated in order for the whole address to be considered validated.
The value specified for Acceptance level corresponds to the second character of
the ACR code. For more information, see The ACR Code on page 58.
The acceptance level differs from the Minimum confidence level for validation
option in that acceptance level measures how many components Validate Global
Address validated, regardless of how well the validated components matched to
address components in the postal databases, whereas Minimum confidence level
for validation indicates the probability that the output address is the correct, validated
version of the input address.
One of the following:
• Country specific—The acceptance level is automatically set to an appropriate
level based on the address's country. For example, U.S. addresses are processed
with an acceptance level of 4.
• Level 0—No components validated (default)
• Level 1—Country only validated
• Level 2—City and country validated
• Level 3—City, postal code and country validated
• Level 4—Street, city, postal code and country validated
• Level 5—Premise number, building name, sub-building, PO box, company, street,
city, postal code, and country validated
Minimum confidence level for
validation
Specifies the minimum confidence level for address validation. Addresses with a
value in the Confidence output field greater than or equal to this value is validated,
and those that have a lower value will not be validated (the output field Status will
contain F.)
Specify any value between 0 and 100. The higher the value, the higher the degree
of confidence necessary for effective address validation. The default is 60.
Outer match score lines
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
A value from 0 to 8 indicating the number of address lines to use when calculating
the outer match score. The default is 8. For more information on the outer match
score, see The Outer Match Score on page 55.
Addressing Guide
47
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Match score weightings
These values specify the relative importance of the similarities or differences between
the input data and the Address Now database for the specified fields. This affects
the confidence value, and can be used to tailor the confidence to distinguish correct
and incorrect updates. For more information, see The ACR Code on page 58.
For each field, specify a whole number from 0 to 10, indicating the relative importance
of this field compared to the others. The default values are:
•
•
•
•
Firm name—1
Street—10
City—8
Postal Code—8
Populate if possible
These options specify which parts of the address to use to validate an address. The
Validate Global Address parses the input address lines into the components
referenced in these options.
Force update
These options specify which fields to correct during validation.
Replace alias
These options specify which address components should be overwritten if the input
data is an alias in the Address Now database. Aliases may be used when postal
codes are changed or for alternative city names. If set to yes, the alias is overwritten
with the master version specified in the Address Now database.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
48
Stages Reference
Output Format Options
Table 15: Validate Global Address Output Format Options
Option
Description
Transliteration
Specifies how to format diacritics in the output address. One of the following:
Retain diacritics
No transliteration is performed. Diacritic characters are left
as specified in the input and/or postal database. Default.
Strip diacritics
Diacritic characters are removed and replaced with the
equivalent unadorned character.
Transliterate
Diacritic characters are transliterated to an equivalent
unadorned character or character sequence using
language-specific transliteration rules.
For example, the following shows the effect of each of the three transliteration options
on a Swedish address. Note the differences in "Västra Frölunda".
Retain diacritics
Gustaf Wernersgata 12 S-42132 Västra Frölunda
Strip diacritics
Gustaf Wernersgata 12 S-42132 Vastra Frolunda
Transliterate
Gustaf Wernersgata 12 S-42132 Vaestra Froelunda
Include in formatted address output Specifies which parts of the address to format with the standards of the appropriate
country. Validate Global Address parses the input address lines into the components
referenced in these options.
Output
Address Data Output
Table 16: Validate Global Address Address Data Output
Field Name
Format
AddressLine1
String [79] The formatted first address line.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
49
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine2
String [79] The formatted second address line.
AddressLine3
String [79] The formatted third address line.
AddressLine4
String [79] The formatted fourth address line.
AddressLine5
String [79] The formatted fifth address line.
AddressLine6
String [79] The formatted sixth address line.
AddressLine7
String [79] The formatted seventh address line.
AddressLine8
String [79] The formatted eighth address line.
ApartmentLabel
String [79] Apartment designator (such as STE or APT). For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
ApartmentNumber
String [79] Apartment number. For example:
123 E Main St. APT 3
Building
String [79] The name of a building.
City
String [79] The city name.
Country
String [79] The ISO code or English name of the country. For a list of ISO codes,
see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
Department
String [79] A subdivision of a country used in French and Spanish speaking
countries. For example, France is divided into 100 departments.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
50
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
FirmName
String [79] The name of a company. For example:
Pitney Bowes
4200 PARLIAMENT PL
STE 600
LANHAM MD 20706-1844
USA
HouseNumber
String [79] House number. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
Latitude
String [79] The most precise latitude that could be determined for the address. This
could be a point level location or a centroid. The level of precision can
be determined by looking at the ECRCode output field. For more
information, see The ECR Code on page 54.
Longitude
String [79] The most precise longitude that could be determined for the address.
This could be a point level location or a centroid. The level of precision
can be determined by looking at the ECRCode output field. For more
information, see The ECR Code on page 54.
POBox
String [79] The post office box number. If the address is a rural route address, the
rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode
String [79] The postal code. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code™.
PostalCode.AddOn
String [79] The 4-digit add-on part of the ZIP + 4® Code. For example, in the ZIP
Code™ 60655-1844, 1844 is the 4-digit add-on. (U.S. addresses only.)
PostalCode.Base
String [79] The 5-digit ZIP Code™. For example 20706 (U.S. addresses only.)
Principality
String [79] An area within a country. For example, England, Scotland, and Wales
are principalities. This field will normally be blank.
StateProvince
String [79] The state or province abbreviation.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
51
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StreetName
String [79] Street name. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
StreetSuffix
String [79] Street suffix. For example:
123 E Main St. Apt 3
SubCity
String [79] A district or suburb. The subcity is used in countries where it is common
to include the district or suburb within the address. For example,
27 Crystal Way
Bradley Stoke
Bristol BS32 8GA
In this case, "Bradley Stoke" is the subcity.
SubStreet
String [79] The second street address used to identify an address. Substreets are
used in countries where it is common to give two street names in the
address. For example,
12 The Mews
High Street
In this example, "High Street" is the substreet. Substreets can be used
to precisely identify the delivery location. In the example, "The Mews"
may be a small street that needs another street identification to properly
locate the address, so "High Street" is included. In this case, "High
Street" is the main or known street.
USCountyName
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
String [79] For U.S. addresses, the name of the county where the address is
located.
Addressing Guide
52
Stages Reference
Return Codes
Table 17: Validate Global Address Return Codes
Field Name
Format
Description
ACRCode
String [79] The Address Correction Result (ACR) code describes what data has
been changed in each record. For information on what this code means,
see The ACR Code on page 58.
Confidence
String [79] The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range
is from zero (0) to 100; zero indicates failure, 100 indicates a very high
level of confidence that the match results are correct. This value is the
same as the last three digits of the ACR code, referred to as the
validation match score. For more information, see The ACR Code on
page 58.
ECRCode
String [79] The Enhanced Correction Result (ECR) code describes the level of
precision of the latitude and longitude returned for the address. For more
information, see The ECR Code on page 54.
Email1
String [79] Extra standardization information.
Email2
String [79] Extra standardization information.
OuterMatchScore
String [79] A score that measures changes to each address line. For more
information, see The Outer Match Score on page 55.
Status
String [79] Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
• null—Success
• F—Failure
Status.Code
String [79] Reason for failure, if there is one.
• UnableToValidate
• ServerError
• CountryNotFound
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
53
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Status.Description
String [79] Description of the problem, if there is one.
• Address Not Found—This value will appear if
Status.Code=UnableToValidate.
• Module not licensed—This value will appear if
Status.Code=ServerError.
• Could Not Identify Country—This value will appear if
Status.Code=CountryNotFound.
URL1
String [79] Extra standardization information.
URL2
String [79] Extra standardization information.
WCRCode
String [79] The Word Correction Result (WCR) code describes vulgar words found
in the input address. The code has two components:
•
•
•
•
Location code—One of the following:
AB—Indicates a vulgarity was found in the address.
NB—Indicates a vulgarity was found in the name.
Count—The number of vulgar words found in the location indicated
by the location code.
For example, AB2 indicates that two vulgar words were found in the
input address.
The ECR Code
The Enhanced Correction Result (ECR) code describes the level of precision of the latitude/longitude
coordinates returned for the address. The code consists of a prefix followed by a dash then the body
of the code.
The prefix always begins with "EL" followed by a number from 1 to 5 indicating the overall level of
precision:
•
•
•
•
•
5—Point geocode
4—Street centroid
3—Postcode centroid
2—City centroid
1—Region centroid
The body of the code identifies the components that were used to match the address to a geocode.
Note that the body consists of letters and numerals. Here's what they mean:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
54
Stages Reference
•
•
•
•
•
•
P—Premise/house number, building or PO box
S—Street
T—City
R—Region/state
Z—Postal code
C—Country
There are only two numeric options in the body: 4 or 0
• 4—The component data was available to make the geocode-address match.
• 0—The component date was not available.
For example: EL4-P0S4T4R4Z4C4
In this example, the 0 following the P tells us that premise/house number data was not available to
make this address match; everything from street to country, however, was used in the assignment.
The Outer Match Score
The outer match score indicates how much Validate Global Address changed each address line to
validate the address. The score compares the address lines before standardization and after
validation and formatting. This score is only generated if you set the option Outer match score
lines to a value greater than 0.
The outer match score is similar to the validation match score, which is part of the ACR code (see
The ACR Code on page 58). The difference is that the outer match score measures any change
to an address line, including formatting, whereas the validation match score measures only whether
or not the data could be validated,
For example, take the following input address lines before processing:
Address Line 1: 5 camden cres
Address Line 2: bath
Address Line 3: uk
After processing the address lines are:
Address Line 1: 5 Camden Crescent
Address Line 2: Bath
Address Line 3: BA1 5HY
Address Line 4: United Kingdom
This has a validation match score of 84% and in outer match score of 23%.
The validation match score is high because the address components were fairly accurate before
validation. The street name was valid except for casing and use of an abbreviation. The city and
country were both valid. The only thing not correct was the postal code (in this case it was missing).
Hence the relatively high validation match score of 84%.
The outer match score is low because after formatting, the address lines are considerably different
from the input. In this case, Address Line 3 contained "uk" on input, and contains "BA1 5HY" on
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
55
Stages Reference
output. Line 4 was empty on input, and in populated on output. Address line 1 has also changed.
The outer score is therefore quite low.
Reports
Validate Global Address can produces reports for batch processing. To create the report, in Enterprise
Designer drag the report icon you want to the canvas. You do not need to draw a connector to the
report.
Address Now Summary Report
Input Name/Address
This section contains high-level counts for the job.
• Input Record Count—The total number of input addresses for the job.
• Address Records Processed—The total number of input addresses for the job.
• Total Records For Which Address Validation Attempted—The number of input records for
which validation was attempted.
• Total Records Successfully Matched—The number of input addresses that were validated or
corrected. This is the number of input addresses that did not result in a status of "F".
• Total Unmatched Records—The number of input addresses that could not be validated or
corrected. This is equal to the number of input addresses that resulted in a status of "F".
• Standard Address Returned Successfully—The number of unmatched (failed) addresses that
Validate Global Address standardized. Standardization only happens if the option Return
standardized data when no match is found is enabled. For more information, see Output Data
Options on page 44.
Address Standardization Results Component Population Counts
This section shows the number of address elements that Validate Global Address standardized in
this job. It includes both the total number for each element and the percentage of the total number
that was standardized. For example, if Street Name shows a count of 6 and a percent of 11 and a
percent of 92%, it means that there were 11 street names that were standardized in the job, and
that represents 92% of the total number of street names in the job.
Address Validation Results
This section lists the validation levels for the job. For more information on validation levels, see The
ACR Code on page 58.
Address Correction Results
This section lists the component status portion of the Address Correction Result (ACR) codes for
this job. The top row of the table lists the component status codes. The body of the table lists the
counts for each address element. For example, the number of street names that had an component
status code of 0, the number that had a code of 1, and so forth. For more information on the
component status portion of the ACR code, see The ACR Code on page 58.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
56
Stages Reference
Validation/Correction Records
This section lists information about postal code validation and correction.
• Original Postal Code Confirmed Via Address Match—The number of addresses whose ACR
component status for the postal code is 2.
• Postal Code Corrected Via Address Match—The number of input postal codes that were incorrect
but were corrected by Validate Global Address.
• Original Postal Code Retained—The number of addresses whose ACR component status for
the postal code is 1.
• No Postal Code Available—The postal data contained no postal code for the address.
Matched Records
This section lists information about input addresses that were matched to known addresses in the
Address Now Module database.
• Total Records Valid On Input—The number of addresses that were confirmed to be correct.
• Total Corrected—The number of addresses that Validate Global Address corrected.
• Total Records Successfully Matched—The total number of addresses that were either validated
or corrected successfully.
Unmatched Records
This section lists information about input addresses that Validate Global Address was not able to
confirm or correct.
• Street Mismatch—The number of addresses whose street could not be validated or corrected.
• House Mismatch—The number of addresses whose house number that could not be validated
or corrected.
• Total Unmatched Records—The total number of addresses that could not be validated or
corrected.
Records Processed
This section lists the number of records processed for each region.
• Records Processed By US—The number of addresses processed by U.S. matching logic.
• Records Processed By Canada—The number of addresses processed by Canadian matching
logic.
• Records Processed By International—The number of addresses processed by international
(non-U.S. and non-Canada) matching logic.
• Total Records Processed—The total number of records in the job.
Address Now Summary Report By Country
This report lists a summary of the results for each country, including the number of addresses
processed for each country and the level of validation obtained.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
57
Stages Reference
Address Now Detailed Report By Country
This report lists the validation results for each address element, for each country.
The ACR Code
The Address Correction Result (ACR) code describes what data has been changed in each record.
An example of an ACR is:
L5-P0S0A5T1R0Z0C4-098
ACR codes consist of three parts:
• Validation Level
• Component Status
• Validation Match Score
Validation Level
The first two characters of the address correction result state the type and level of validation.
The first character, which is always alphabetic, specifies the type of validation:
•
•
•
•
U—Unable to standardize address
C—Address is in component form
L—Address has been formatted into address lines
R—Address has been reverted and has not reached acceptable level
The second character, which is always numeric, specifies the level of validation. The higher the
level, the better the validation will be. The levels that can be achieved are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
0—No components validated
1—Country only validated
2—City and country validated
3—City, postal code and country validated
4—Street, city, postal code and country validated
5—Premise number, building name, sub-building, PO box, company, street, city, postal code, and
country validated.
Component Status
The second part of the ACR code gives the status of the main address components. The address
components are identified as follows:
• Character 3-4: P—Premise/house number
• Character 5-6: S—Street
• Character 7-8: A—Subcity (city area)
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
58
Stages Reference
•
•
•
•
Character 9-10: T—City
Character 11-12: R—Region/state
Character 13-14: Z—Postal code/ZIP Code®
Character 15-16: C—Country
A number follows each component and can take one of the these values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0—Not found/empty
1—Derived using position in input data
2—Recognized using the Address Now Module database
3—Recognized and updated to standard form using the Address Now Module database
4—Validated using Address Now Module database
5—Updated/corrected using Address Now Module database
6—Added using Address Now Module database
7—Correctly empty
8—Partial recognition using Address Now Module database
9—Needs correcting to match Address Now Module database
Validation Match Score
The Validation Match Score comprises characters 17-19, the final three digits of the ACR code. This
is a comparison between the standardized data (in component format) and the suggested match
returned from the Address Now Module database.
This score is calculated by examining all fields returned from the Address Now Module database
and comparing them individually with the existing component data. The overall match score is then
calculated by combining these individual values into an average score, taking into account the match
score weightings, which can be set from the address validation options dialog box. For example,
Input data:
AddressLine1: 11 High Street
City: Anytown
Country: UK
Standardized data:
Premise: 11
Street: High Street
City: Anytown
When validated, the data returned from the Address Now Module database for this record may be:
Premise: 11
Street: High Street
City: Anytown
Postal Code: ZZ9 9ZZ
Comparing the Address Now Module database to the standardized data we get:
• Premise: 100% match
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
59
Stages Reference
• Street: 100% match
• City: 100% match
• Postal Code: not used, because empty on input
Combining these percentages gives us a match score of 100%.
Another example may be:
Input data:
AddressLine1: bergerstrasse 12
AddressLine2: munich
AddressLine3: 80124
Country: Germany
Standardized data:
Premise: 12
Street: Bergerstr.
City: München
Postal Code: 80124
Address Now Module database output:
Premise: 12
Street: Burgerstr.
City: München
Postal Code: 80142
Comparing the Address Now Module database output to the standardized data we get:
•
•
•
•
Premise: 100% match
Street: 90% match (the actual figure is determined by a textual comparison of the two values)
City: 100% match
Postal Code: 80% match (because the numbers are transposed)
This gives an overall match score of 92% if the match score weightings are all set at 1. Increasing
the match score weighting of the postal code will decrease the match score, because the postal
code component score (80%) will be made more important in the calculation. Increasing the match
score weighting of the city will increase the match score, because the city component score (100%)
will be made more important.
For example:
L5-P4S4A5T5R4Z4C4-098
• L shows that formatting has been carried out to create the address lines
• The validation level is 5, meaning that the highest level of matching against the Address Now
Module database was attained
• All component codes except subcity (A) and city (T) are set to 4 indicating that they were validated
using the Address Now Module database
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
60
Stages Reference
• The subcity code and city code are set to 5 indicating that these components were corrected using
the Address Now Module database
The overall address matched the Address Now Module database at 98%.
Note: You may also receive a value of "SDS" for the Validation Match Score. A return of
SDS indicates that the address has not been standardized, possibly as a result of the address
being reverted.
Global Addressing Module
Global Addressing Module
The Global Addressing Module for the Spectrum™ Technology Platform provides enhanced address
standardization and validation for addresses outside the U.S. The Global Addressing Module provides
benefits that include:
• Better data—Global Address Validation combines data from multiple data sources into a single
Global Addressing Validation database to provide the most extensive and accurate international
addressing data possible.
• Global addressing expertise—Global Addressing Validation analyzes and compares each input
address to the Global Addressing database for the appropriate country. If needed, Global Address
Validation corrects and formats the address based on postal standards and user preferences.
• Automated address suggestion—Global Type Ahead automatically suggests addresses as you
type characters.
• Address parsing—Global Address Parser splits address strings into individual address elements
with the help of machine learning techniques.
Components
The Global Addressing Module consists of:
• Global Address Validation—Analyzes and compares each input address to the Global Addressing
database for the appropriate country. If needed, Global Address Validation corrects and formats
the address in accordance with the postal standards for that country.
• Global Type-Ahead—Automatically suggests addresses as you type and immediately returns
candidates based on your input.
• Global Address Parser—Splits address strings into individual address elements, such as name
of organization, city, locality, district, and postal code, using machine learning techniques.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
61
Stages Reference
Installing Global Addressing Module Databases
This procedure describes how to download and install Global Addressing Module databases in the
Spectrum™ Product Database (SPD) format from the Pitney Bowes eStore.
Disk Space
The disk space requirements for extracted and non-extracted SPD bundles are:
• Extracted bundles (all SPD) - 50 GB
• Non-extracted bundles (all SPD) - 20 GB
Memory
The following table provides information on the Global Address Module memory requirements for
each country database.
Table 18: Global Address Validation Memory Requirements (in Megabytes)
Country Database Name
Global Address Validation
Global Type Ahead
Both
Argentina (ARG)
700
n/a
n/a
Australia (AUS)
700
n/a
n/a
Austria (AUT)
900
700
1900
Belgium (BEL)
900
700
1900
Brazil (BRA)
700
700
700
China (CHN)
700
n/a
n/a
Czech Republic (CHZ)
700
n/a
n/a
Denmark (DNK)
2100
700
3400
Finland (FIN)
900
700
1900
France (FRA)
2800
700
4100
Germany (DEU)
700
700
1900
Greece (GRC)
700
n/a
n/a
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
62
Stages Reference
Country Database Name
Global Address Validation
Global Type Ahead
Both
India (IND)
700
n/a
n/a
Ireland (IRL)
900
700
1900
Italy (ITA)
700
700
1900
Japan (JPN)
700
n/a
n/a
Malaysia (MYS)
700
n/a
n/a
Mexico (MEX)
700
n/a
n/a
Netherlands (NLD)
700
n/a
n/a
New Zealand (NZL)
700
n/a
n/a
Norway (NOR)
700
700
1900
Poland (POL)
700
n/a
n/a
Russia (RUS)
700
n/a
n/a
Spain (ESP)
1300
700
1900
Sweden (SWE)
900
n/a
n/a
Switzerland (CHE)
700
700
1900
United Kingdom (GBR)
980
700
1900
To download and install a Global Addressing Module database resource in the Spectrum™ Product
Database (SPD) format:
1. Make sure no applications are running.
2. Select and download your licensed SPD files (xxx.spd) from the Pitney Bowes eStore using the
link provided in the release announcement or welcome email.
3. The database is downloaded as a zip file. Unzip the database before proceeding with the
installation.
4. Install the SPD files:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
63
Stages Reference
a) Place the SPD files in <SpectrumLocation>/server/app/dataimport. This is the
default location for SPD files. The Spectrum™ Technology Platform server monitors this
folder and looks for new files in two-second intervals.
You can change the location of the data import directory by altering the platform property
in the
<SpectrumLocation>/server/app/conf/dataimportdirectories.properties
file.
b) When the server detects new SPD files, the server automatically extracts the SPD files to
<SpectrumLocation>/server/app/repository/datastorage.
You can change the location of the data storage folder by altering the
spectrum.data.manager.storage.directory property in the Data Manager settings section
of the <SpectrumLocation>/server/app/conf/spectrum-container.properties
file.
c) By default, the SPD files are deleted after the files are extracted. However, you can archive
SPD files by setting the spectrum.data.manager.archive.data property to "true" in the
Data Manager settings section of the
<SpectrumLocation>/server/app/conf/spectrum-container.properties file.
d) At this point the data will become available and you can add it as a Spectrum™ database
resource in the Spectrum™ Databases section of Management Console.
e) After you install the database files, use either the Database Resource tool in the Management
Console or the Global Addressing Administration Utility database commands to define the
database as a resource. For more information on the Administration Utility database
commands, see the section "Global Addressing Module Databases" in the Spectrum™
Technology Administration Guide.
Adding, Modifying, or Deleting a Global Addressing Module Database Resource
Whenever you install a new database resource or modify an existing database resource you must
define it in the Management Console in order for it to become available on your system. This
procedure describes how to add or modify a database resource for the Global Addressing Module.
To create a Global Addressing Module database resource:
1. If you have not already done so, install the database files on your system. For instructions on
installing databases, see the section "Installing Global Addressing Module Databases".
2. In Management Console, under Resources, choose Spectrum Databases.
3. You can use the buttons at the top left to manage your databases:
To create a new database, click Add
.
To change an existing database, select the database and then click Edit
To delete a database, select the database and then click Delete
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
.
.
64
Stages Reference
To create a new database by copying an existing database, click Copy
.
4. If you are creating a new database, on the Add Database page, enter a name for the database
resource in the Name field. If you are creating a new database by copying an existing one,
rename the default name as needed. You cannot modify the name of an existing database
resource, because any services or jobs that reference the database resource by its original
name would fail.
5. In the Pool size field, specify the maximum number of concurrent requests you want this
database to handle.
The optimal pool size varies by module. You will generally see the best results by setting the
pool size between one-half to twice the number of CPUs on the server, with the optimal pool
size for most modules being the same as the number of CPUs. For example, if your server has
four CPUs you may want to experiment with a pool size between 2 (one-half the number of
CPUs) and 8 (twice the number of CPUs) with the optimal size possibly being 4 (the number of
CPUs).
When modifying the pool size you must also consider the number of runtime instances specified
in the dataflow for the stages accessing the database. Consider for example a dataflow that
has a Global Address Validation stage that is configured to use one runtime instance. If you set
the pool size for the Global Address Validation database to four, you will not see a performance
improvement because there would be only one runtime instance and therefore there would only
be one request at a time to the database. However, if you were to increase the number of runtime
instances of the Global Address Validation stage to four, you might then see an improvement
in performance since there would be four instances of the Global Address Validation stage
accessing the database simultaneously, therefore using the full pool. For more information about
setting runtime instances, see the Spectrum™ Technology Administration Guide.
Tip: You should conduct performance tests with various settings to identify the optimal pool
size and runtime instance settings for your environment.
6. In the Module field, select Global Address Validation Coder.
7. In the Type field, select Global Addressing.
8. To select all Global Addressing databases and all countries within those databases, click Include
at the top of the list of available databases. To select only specific individual databases and all
countries within those individual databases, click Include next to the individual databases.
Tip: To see the countries included in an individual database, click the arrow to the left of a
database. You can also click Include at this level to include only specific countries in an individual
database.
Note: For optimum performance, distribute countries across multiple regional Database
Resources. For example, group APAC countries into one Database Resource and EMEA
countries into another Database Resource.
9. Click Save to add and save the selected databases. The Spectrum™ Databases page displays
the added or modified databases.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
65
Stages Reference
Global Address Validation
Global Addressing Validation provides enhanced address standardization and validation for
international addresses outside the U.S. Global Address Validation is part of the Global Addressing
Module.
Supported Countries
Global Address Validation provides enhanced address standardization and validation for the following
prioritized countries. The three-digit ISO country code is shown for each country. For a complete
list of all ISO country codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support on page 284.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Argentina (ARG)
Australia (AUS)
Austria (AUT)
Belgium (BEL)
Brazil (BRA)
China (CHN)
Czech Republic (CHZ)
Denmark (DNK)
Finland (FIN)
France (FRA)
Germany (DEU)
Greece (GRC)
India (IND)
Ireland (IRL)
Italy (ITA)
Japan (JPN)
Malaysia (MYS)
Mexico (MEX)
Netherlands (NLD)
New Zealand (NZL)
Norway (NOR)
Poland (POL)
Russia (RUS)
Spain (ESP)
Sweden (SWE)
Switzerland (CHE)
United Kingdom (GBR) (Includes POI information)
Global Address Validation provides additional support for 130+ countries worldwide.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
66
Stages Reference
Using Global Address Validation
After installing and deploying the Global Addressing Module, you can use Global Address Validation:
• As a service from Management Console
• As a stage from Enterprise Designer
Using Global Address Validation As a Service
To use Global Address Validation as a service from Management Console:
1. Open the Management Console.
2. Under the Services tab, select Global Addressing.
3. From the list of services on the left side of the pane, select Global Address Validation.
4. On the Database Resources tab, select the Global Address Validation database resource to
use.
5. Click Save to save your database selection.
6. On the Default Options tab, specify the options you want. For information on the options, see
Options on page 69.
7. If you make changes to the global default options, click Save to save those changes. Any
changes you make to the global default options are also applied to Global Address Validation
in Enterprise Designer.
8. Click the Preview tab.
9. On the Preview tab, enter your input address elements in the appropriate fields. For information
on the input fields, see Input on page 68.
10. Click Run Preview.
11. In Preview Output Records, on the right side of the pane, note that the results of the search
have been placed in the appropriate output field. For information on the output fields, see Output
on page 72.
12. In the Preview tab, you can:
a) Use Add
b) Use Import
c) Use Delete
to add additional input records for Run Preview processing.
to import a number of input records for Run Preview processing.
to delete all records from the current Run Preview session.
Using Global Address Validation As a Stage
You can use Global Address Validation as a stage from Enterprise Designer to perform address
validation as a batch process. For more information about creating a job using Global Address
Validation as a stage, see:
• My First Dataflow (Job) in the Dataflow Designer Guide
• Input
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
67
Stages Reference
• Options
• Output
Input
Global Address Validation uses an address as input. All addresses use this format regardless of
the address's country. To obtain the best performance and address match, your input address lists
should be as complete as possible, free of misspellings and incomplete addresses, and as close to
postal authority standards as possible. Most postal authorities have websites that contain information
about address standards for their particular country.
Note: The country name or two- or three- character country ISO code is optional. If you omit
the country, Global Address Validation returns the best available candidates for the Default
Country selected on the Default Options tab. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country
Codes and Module Support on page 284.
Table 19: Global Address Validation Input
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String
The first address line. For example, 34 GLENVIEW ROAD MOUNT
KURNING-GAI NSW 2080.
LastLine
String
The last line of the address. For example, 34 GLENVIEW ROAD MOUNT
KURNING-GAI NSW 2080.
Note: Global Address Validation only considers the LastLine
information when individual components such as City and
PostalCode are not provided.
City
String
The city or town name. To produce the best match results, your input
address should use the official city name.
CitySubdivision
String
The name of one of the following depending on the country:
• Not used—AUS, AUT, BEL, CHE, DEU, DNK, FIN, FRA, IRL, MYS,
NLD, NOR, POL, SWE
• Locality—BRA, GBR, GRC, ITA, ESP
• Suburb—NZL
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
68
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StateProvince
String
The name of the state or province depending on the country:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
StateProvinceSubdivision
String
Not used—BEL, CHE, DNK, IRL, NLD, NOR
Bundesland—DEU
Province (voivodship)—POL
Region—AUT, ESP, FRA, GBR, GRC, NZL
Region (län)—FIN
Region (lan)—SWE
State—AUS, BRA
State (negeri)—MYS
The name of the state or province subdivision depending on the country:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Not used—AUT, BRA, FIN, GBR, MYS
Department—FRA
District—GRC
District (fylke/counties)—NOR
District (poviat)—POL
Kommun—SWE
Kreis—DEU
Local Government Authority (LGA)—AUS
Province—BEL, CHE, DNK, ESP, IRL, ITA, NLD
Region—NZL
PostalCode
String
The postal code in the appropriate format for the country.
Country
String
The country name of the two- or three-character ISO country code. This
field is optional. If you omit the country, Global Address Validation returns
the best available candidates for the Default Country selected on the
Default Options tab. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes
and Module Support on page 284.
FirmName
String
Company, firm name, or place name. For example, PITNEY BOWES.
Options
Global Address Validation uses the default options settings to define address validation processing.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
69
Stages Reference
Table 20: Global Address Validation Options
Option Name
Country Description
Support
Database
All
The database to use for address processing. Only databases that have
been defined in the Database Resources panel in the Management
Console are available.
Casing
All
The format for the returned address:
Default country
All
Mixed
The output data is returned in a mixed case format. For
example, 100 Main Street.
Lower
The output data is returned in an all lower case format.
For example, 100 main street.
Upper
The output data is returned in an all upper case format.
For example, 100 MAIN STREET. Default.
The default country for address processing.
To improve coding performance when your input addresses do not
contain country information, set up an additional instance of the Global
Address Validation stage as a preliminary stage to process and retrieve
the country code for the input addresses.
1.
Set up an additional instance of the Global Address Validation
stage as a preliminary (first) stage in your dataflow.
Give the preliminary stage a unique label. For example, "Identify
Country".
Specify "World" as the default country for the preliminary stage.
The preliminary stage uses the available input address elements
with additional data sources (available when you select "World" as
the default country) to determine the country code. The
"country-coded" output from the preliminary stage becomes the
input for the next step in the dataflow.
2.
As the next step in the dataflow, the addresses are sent through
a second Global Address Validation stage with the proper country
code (retrieved in the preliminary stage) to validate the address to
the street/house/premise level.
Return multiple addresses
All
The number of match candidates to return. Using a looser Match Mode
setting such as "Relaxed" can result in the matching output including
multiple match candidates. The specified number of match candidates
are presented to the user to select the desired match candidate. If an
exact match is found, the single match candidate is returned.
City fallback
All
When a street level match cannot be made, use the input city to
determine match candidates.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
70
Stages Reference
Option Name
Postal fallback
Prefer postal code over city
Match mode
Custom match fields
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Country Description
Support
All
When a street level match cannot be made, use the input postal code
to determine match candidates.
AUS
Prefer candidates matching the input postal code over matches to input
city. Default = disabled.
All
Match modes determine the leniency used to make a match between
the input address and the reference data. Select one of the following
match modes based on the quality of your input and your desired output.
All
Exact
A very tight match. This restrictive mode generates the
fewest match candidates. When using this mode, ensure
that your input is very clean; free of misspellings and
incomplete addresses.
Relaxed
A loose match. This mode generates the most match
candidates and results in more multiple matches. Use this
mode if you are not confident that your input is clean and
free of misspellings and incomplete addresses.
Custom
A custom match. Allows you to define the matching criteria
by selecting Custom Match Fields.
These options set the match criteria for determining match candidates.
To enable these options, you must set the Match Mode to Custom.
By default, these options are disabled.
Address number
A match must be made to the input address
number.
Street
A match must be made to the input street
name, type, and directional fields.
City
A match must be made to the input address
city.
City subdivision
A match must be made to the input address
city subdivision.
State/province
A match must be made to the input address
state or province.
State/province
subdivision
A match must be made to the input address
state or province subdivision.
Postcode
A match must be made to the input address
postal code.
Addressing Guide
71
Stages Reference
Option Name
Output options
Country Description
Support
All
The elements to be returned by Global Address Validation processing:
Parsed address
The parsed address elements (for example,
Address Line 1, postal codes, and country). The
meaning of some of these fields may vary by
country. Do not select Parsed address when
returning G/Z level matches.
Precision
A code describing the precision of the address
match.
Input address
Returns the original input address.
Country specific
fields
Returns country-specific output information.
Output
Global Address Validation output is determined by the output options you select.
Standard Address Output
Standard address output consists of address lines which correspond to how the address would
appear on an address label. City, state or province, postal code, and other data are also included
in the standard address output.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
72
Stages Reference
Table 21: Standard Address Output
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressBlock1-2
String
The AddressBlock output fields contain a formatted version of the
standardized or normalized address as it would be printed on a physical
mailpiece. Global Address Validation formats the address into address
blocks using postal authority standards. Each line of the address is
returned in a separate address block field. There can be up to two
address block output fields: AddressBlock1 and AddressBlock2.
AddressBlock1 includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Firm Name
Unit Number
Unit Type
House Number
Street Name
AddressBlock2 includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Locality
Town
Postal Code
County
State
For example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 34 Glenview Road
City: Mount Kurning-Gai StateProvince: NSW PostalCode: 2080
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 34 Glenview Road
AddressBlock2: Mount Kurning-Gai NSW 2080
AddressLine1
String
The first address line. For example, 34 GLENVIEW ROAD MOUNT
KURNING-GAI NSW 2080.
ApartmentLabel
String
The flat or unit type. For example, 39 Acacia Avenue Flat B.
ApartmentNumber
String
The flat or unit number. For example, 39 Acacia Avenue Flat B.
Building
String
The name of a building.
City
String
The city or town name. Your input address should use the official city
name to produce the best match results.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
73
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
City.Matched
String
The status of the city match.
CitySubdivision
String
True
Matched on the city name.
False
Did not match on the city name.
The name of one of the following depending on the country:
• Not used—AUS, AUT, BEL, CHE, DEU, DNK, FIN, FRA, IRL, MYS,
NLD, NOR, POL, SWE
• Locality—BRA, GBR, GRC, ITA, ESP
• Suburb—NZL
CitySubdivision.Matched
String
The status of the match on city subdivision.
True
Matched on the city subdivision.
False
Did not match on the city subdivision.
Confidence
String
The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range
is from zero (0) to 100. Zero indicates failure. 100 indicates a very high
level of confidence that the match results are correct.
Country
String
The country in the language or code specified in the Country format
option. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module
Support on page 284.
Country specific fields
String
The country specific output information. To include the country specific
output information in the output, check the Country specific fields
output option.
FirmName
String
The name of a company.
HouseNumber
String
The house number. For example, 39 Acacia Avenue.
Housenumber.Matched
String
The status of the match on house number.
LeadingDirectional
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
String
True
Matched on the house number.
False
Did not match on the house number.
The leading directional. For example, 123 E Main St Apt 3.
Addressing Guide
74
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
MatchOnAllStreetFields
String
The status of the match on all street fields.
MatchOnStreetDirectional
String
True
Matched on all street fields.
False
Did not match on all street fields.
The status of the match on street directional.
True
Matched on the street directional.
False
Did not match on the street directional.
MultimatchCount
String
If the address was matched to multiple candidate addresses in the
reference data, this field contains the number of candidate matches
found.
PostalCode
String
The postal code for the address. The format of the postal code varies
by country.
PostalCode.AddOn
String
The second part of a postal code. This field is not used by most
countries.
Postalcode.Matched
String
The status of the match on postal code.
True
Matched on the postal code.
False
Did not match on the postal code.
Principality
String
An area within a country. For example, England, Scotland, and Wales
are principalities. This field will normally be blank.
ProcessedBy
String
The Global Addressing Module stage name.
StateProvince
String
The name of one of the state or province depending on the country:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Not used—BEL, CHE, DNK, IRL, NLD, NOR
Bundesland—DEU
Province (voivodship)—POL
Region—AUT, ESP, FRA, GBR, GRC, NZL
Region (län)—FIN
Region (lan)—SWE
State—AUS, BRA
State (negeri)—MYS
Addressing Guide
75
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StateProvince.Matched
String
The status of the match on state or province.
StateProvinceSubdivision
String
True
Matched on the state or province.
False
Did not match on the state or province.
The name of the state or province subdivision depending on the country.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
StateProvinceSubdivision.Matched String
Not used—AUT, BRA, FIN, GBR, MYS
Department—FRA
District—GRC
District (fylke/counties)—NOR
District (poviat)—POL
Kommun—SWE
Kreis—DEU
Local Government Authority (LGA)—AUS
Province—BEL, CHE, DNK, ESP, IRL, ITA, NLD
Region—NZL
The status of the match on state or province subdivision.
True
Matched on the state or province subdivision.
False
Did not match on the state or province subdivision.
StreetName
String
The name of street where the property is located. For example, 123 E
Main St.
StreetName.Matched
String
The status of the match on street name.
True
Matched on the street name.
False
Did not match on the street name.
StreetType
String
The street type. For example, 123 E Main St Apt 3. In another example,
123 E Main Ave Apt 3. These are two entirely different entities. Using
street types adds precision to your data.
StreetType.Matched
String
The status of the match on street type.
TrailingDirectional
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
String
True
Matched on the street type.
False
Did not match on the street type.
The trailing directional. For example, 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW.
Addressing Guide
76
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
Vendor Code
String
The vendor code. This field is only available if you select the output
option "Country specific fields".
Parsed Input
The output can include the input address in parsed form. This type of output is referred to as "parsed
input." Parsed input fields contain the address data that was used as input regardless of whether
or not Global Address Validation validated the address. This information is not available when the
address is validated at the postal / city level . It is available when an address gets validated at the
street level. To include parsed input fields in the output, check the Parsed address output option.
Table 22: Parsed Input
Field Name
Format
Description
ParsedAddressLine1.Input
String
The first address line passed on input.
ParsedCity.Input
String
The city/locality/suburb name passed on input.
ParsedCountry.Input
String
The country passed on input.
ParsedHouseNumber.Input
String
The house number passed on input. For example, 123 E Main St Apt
3.
ParsedPostStreetType.Input
String
The street type passed on input. For example, 123 E Main St Apt 3.
Precision
The output can include the precision code that describes the precision of the address match for the
input address. To include the precision code in the output, check the Precision output option.
Note: The "Precision code counts" section on the Match Analysis Report only displays when
you check the "Precision" output option.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
77
Stages Reference
Table 23: Precision
Field Name
Format
PrecisionCode
String
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
78
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
A code describing the precision of the address match.
The matches in the "Z" category indicate that a match was made at the
postal code level.
Z1
Postal match with postal code 1.
Z2
Postal match with partial post code 2.
Z3
Postal match with postal code 2.
G1
Geographic match with area name 1.
G2
Geographic match with area name 2.
G3
Geographic match with area name 3.
G4
Geographic match with area name 4.
The matches in the "S" category indicate that the record was matched
to a single address candidate.
SX
Validated at a street intersection.
SC
Match at the house-level that has been projected from
the nearest segment.
S0
Parts of the address may have matched the source data.
S4
Validated at a street.
S5
Validated at a street address.
S7
Located at a street address that has been interpolated
between houses.
S8
Match located at the house.
For S (street matched) precision codes, eight additional characters
describe how closely the address matches an address in the database.
The characters appear in the order shown.
For example, the result code S5--N-SCZA represents a single match
that matched the street name, street suffix direction, town, and postal
code. The dashes indicate that there was no match on house number,
street prefix direction, or thoroughfare type. The match came from the
Street Range Address database. This record would be matched at the
street address level of the match candidate.
H
House number match.
P
Street prefix (pre-directional). P is present if any of these
conditions are satisfied:
• The candidate pre-directional matches the input
pre-directional.
• The candidate post-directional matches the input
pre-directional after pre- and post-directionals are swapped.
• The input does not have a pre-directional.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
79
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
N
Street name match.
T
Street/thoroughfare type match.
S
Street suffix (post-directional).
• The candidate post-directional matches the input
post-directional.
• The candidate pre-directional matches the input
post-directional after pre- and post-directionals are swapped.
• The input does not have a post-directional.
C
City or town name.
Z
Postal code match.
A
Addressing dataset match.
U
Custom user dictionary match.
Input Address
The output can include the input address. To include the input address, check the Input address
output option.
Table 24: Input Address
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1.Input
String
The first address line passed on input.
City.Input
String
The city/locality/suburb name passed on input.
CitySubdivision.Input
String
The city/town subdivision passed on input.
StateProvince.Input
String
The state/province passed on input.
StateProvinceSubdivision.Input
String
The state/province subdivision passed on input.
PostalCode.Input
String
The postal code passed on input.
Country.Input
String
The country passed on input.
FirmName.Input
String
The firm name passed on input.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
80
Stages Reference
Country Specific Fields
The output can include country specific fields. To include country specific fields in the output, check
the Country specific fields output option.
Table 25: Australia (AUS) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
AUS.GNAF_PARCEL_ID
String
The GNAF parcel identifier.
AUS.GNAF_PID
String
The GNAF Persistent Identifier (GNAF PID) is a 14-character
alphanumeric string that uniquely identifies each GNAF address. The
PID is constructed from a combination of the major address fields of the
GNAF Dictionary. For example, GAVIC421397369.
AUS.GNAF_PRINCIPAL_PID
String
The Persistent Identifier of the principal address.
AUS.GNAF_ADDRESS_CLASS
String
The GNAF address classification.
AUS.GNAF_SA1
String
The GNAF Statistical Area Level 1 (SA1) identifier.
AUS.LEVEL_NUMBER
String
The number of a floor or level in a multi-story building. For example,
Floor 2, 17 Jones Street.
Table 26: United Kingdom (GBR) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
GBR.DEPENDENT_STREET_
NAME
String
The addresses in the United Kingdom may contain two street names:
a main street name and dependent street name. Some addresses may
not contain a street name at all.
GBR.DEPENDENT_LOCALITY
String
The dependent locality name. A dependent locality is a large village or
district. For example, Wimbledon.
GBR.DOUBLE_DEPENDENT_
LOCALITY
String
The double dependent locality name. A double dependent locality is a
small village or subdistrict.
GBR.HISTORIC_POSTCODE
String
If the input address contained an old postal code that has been replaced
by a new postal code, this field contains the old postal code.
GBR.ALIASED_LOCALITY
String
A locality that is not part of the postal address.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
81
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
GBR.OSAPR
String
The Ordnance Survey Address Point reference (OSAPR). Each address
has a unique OSAPR. OSAPRs are always 18 characters long and must
start with the letters AP.
GBR.UPRN
String
The Unique Property Reference Number. The UPRN is a unique identifier
that provides a persistent reference to a unique property, regardless of
changes in the property name, status, subdivision, use (such as from
single occupancy to multiple occupancy), or demolition of the property.
All historic, alternative, and provisional addresses are recorded against
the same UPRN. The UPRN field is not returned for Northern Ireland
addresses.
GBR.RPC
String
The RPC identifies the positional accuracy of the candidate. The RPC
describes the accuracy of the coordinates allocated to the address.
Table 27: Ireland (IRL) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
IRL.EIRCODE
String
The Eircode for the address. The Eircode is a seven character
alpha-numeric code made up of two parts.
Routing key
The first three characters define a principal post
town span of delivery.
Unique Identifier
The last four characters uniquely identify each
residential and business address.
Table 28: Italy (ITA) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
ITA.HISTORICALPOSTCODE
String
The previous postal code for this address.
Table 29: Netherlands (NLD) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
NLD.EXTENED_POST_CODE
String
This field is both an input and output field that supports a 6-digit postal
code. The output contains a candidate’s 6-digit postal code if one is
available.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
82
Stages Reference
Table 30: New Zealand (NZL) Country Specific Fields
Field Name
Format
Description
NZL.ALIASED_SUBURB
String
The New Zealand aliased suburb. An alternative to the
officially-recognized suburb name.
Reports
Match Analysis by Country
The Global Address Validation Match Analysis by Country Report provides address matching
summary statistics for each country processed in your job. For instructions on how to use reports,
see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow Designer's Guide.
Summary of Matched Elements
This section contains summary information on matched elements for each country.
Total country records
The total number of input records processed for the country
listed.
House number matched
The number and the percentage of records that matched on
the house number.
Street name matched
The number and the percentage of records that matched on
the street name.
City name matched
The number and the percentage of records that matched on
the city name.
Postal code matched
The number and the percentage of records that matched on
the postal code.
State/Province matched
The number and the percentage of records that matched on
the state/province.
Precision Code Counts
This section provides statistics on the number and the percentage of records in your job that matched
for each precision code. The precision code describes the level of precision for each record's address
match.
Note: The "Precision code counts" section on the Match Analysis Report only displays when
you check the Precision output option.
Precision Code Z Category
The Z category indicates that a match was made at the postal code level. A postal code match is
returned in either of these cases:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
83
Stages Reference
• You specified to match to postal code. The resulting match is located at the postal code with the
following possible accuracy levels.
• There is no street level match and you specified to fall back to postal code.
Precision Code Z1
The number and percentage of records that match to the ZIP Code
or postal code 1.
Precision Code Z2
The number and percentage of records that result in a ZIP + 2 or
partial match to postal code 2.
Precision Code Z3
The number and percentage of records that match to ZIP + 4 or
postal code 2.
Precision Code G Category
Geographic level candidates return a precision code beginning with the letter G. The number following
the G in the precision code provides more detailed information on the accuracy of the match.
Precision Code G1
The number and percentage of records that match to
state/province (area name 1).
Precision Code G2
The number and percentage of records that match to county/region
(area name 2).
Precision Code G3
The number and percentage of records that match to city/town
(area name 3).
Precision Code G4
The number and percentage of records that match to
suburb/village (area name 4).
Precision Code S Category
Street level candidates return a precision code beginning with the letter S. The character following
the S in the precision code provides more detailed information on the accuracy of the match.
Precision Code SX
The number and percentage of records that validated at a street
intersection.
Precision Code SC
The number and percentage of records that matched at the
house-level that has been projected from the nearest segment.
Precision Code S0
The number and percentage of records where parts of the address
may have matched the source data.
Precision Code S4
The number and percentage of records that matched at the street
level.
Precision Code S5
The number and percentage of records that matched to the street
address.
Precision Code S7
The number and percentage of records that matched to a street
address that was interpolated between houses.
Precision Code S8
The number and percentage of records that matched to the street
address or house number.
For more information about the S precision code, see the Global Address Validation Output section.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
84
Stages Reference
Confidence Levels
This section provides a graphical representation of the percentage of records for each country that
matched at different confidence levels. The confidence level assigned to a returned address ranges
from zero (0) to 100. Zero indicates failure. 100 indicates a very high level of confidence that the
match results are correct.
Note: The confidence levels are calculated as a percentage of matched records. Input records
that fail (Status.Code=F) and do not match are not included in the confidence level calculations
and are not included in the confidence level graph on the report.
Confidence level less than 40
The percentage of records that match at a confidence level
less than 40 (low).
Confidence level 40-85
The percentage of records that match at a confidence level
between 40 and 85 (medium).
Confidence level greater than 85 The percentage of records that match at a confidence level
greater than 85 (high).
Summary of Matched Elements for: Unknown
This section of the report provides matching statistics on records for which the input country code
was not recognized and the country was not determined via address match.
Note: This section only displays when the output from your job includes records that did not
match on country.
Precision Code Counts for: Unknown
This section provides matching precision statistics on records for which the input country code was
not recognized and the country was not determined via address match. The precision code describes
the level of precision for each record's address match.
Note: The "Precision code counts" section on the Match Analysis Report only displays when
you check the Precision output option.
Summary of Matched Elements for: All Countries
This section of the report provides matching statistics for all input addresses that matched on country
for all countries combined.
Precision Code Counts for: All Countries
This section provides matching precision statistics for all input addresses that matched on country
for all countries combined. The precision code describes the level of precision for each record's
address match.
Note: The "Precision code counts" section on the Match Analysis Report only displays when
you check the Precision output option.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
85
Stages Reference
Precision Code Definitions
This section provides a reference for the precision codes that display on the report. For more
information on precision codes, see the Global Address Validation Output section.
Report Footer
The footer on each page displays the time the report was generated and the page number.
Address Matching Summary Report
The Address Matching Summary Report provides summary matching statistics for each country
processed. For instructions on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow
Designer's Guide.
Country
This section provides matching statistics for each country processed.
Country
This column lists each country processed in your job.
Matched Records
The number of records that were successfully matched.
Matched Records %
The percentage of records that were successfully matched.
Unmatched Records
The number of records that were not successfully matched.
Unmatched Records %
The percentage of records that were not successfully matched.
Total Records
The total number of records processed for the country.
All Records
This section lists the total matching results for all countries processed.
Matched Records
The total number of records that were successfully matched.
Matched Records %
The percentage of all records in your job that were successfully
matched.
Unmatched Records
The total number of records that were not successfully matched.
Unmatched Records %
The percentage of all records in your job that were not
successfully matched.
Total Records
The total number of matched and unmatched records processed
in your job.
Global Type Ahead
Global Type Ahead automatically suggests addresses as you type and immediately returns candidates
based on your input. You can then select your candidate from the presented candidate list. Global
Type Ahead is part of the Global Addressing Module.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
86
Stages Reference
Global Type Ahead Features
Global Type Ahead provides the following capabilities.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select country (optional). See Supported Countries on page 87 for a list of available countries.
Single line input search for street addresses
Specify the number of candidates to display
Candidates returned in order based on closest match
Search Points of Interest (POI)
Search All to include both street addresses and POI
Fuzzy Match capabilities
Note: POI and category/subcategory features are accessible only if available and you have
licensed and installed POI data.
For both address searches and POI searches, candidates are displayed as you type. As you type
more specific information, the results are refined to display more relevant candidates. Candidates
include the full address and POI (if the candidate is a Point of Interest).
After installing and deploying Global Type Ahead, you can use the Management Console to explore
all the capabilities and see candidate results.
A sample application for Global Type Ahead is available on the Spectrum™ landing page.
Supported Countries
Global Type Ahead covers street addresses and Points of Interest (POIs) for the following countries.
The three-digit ISO country code is shown for each country. For a complete list of all ISO country
codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support on page 284.
Note: The POI data must be purchased separately. POI and category/subcategory features
are accessible only if available and you have licensed and installed POI data. Street address
data is packaged with the Global Addressing Module.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Andorra (AND)
Australia (AUS)
Austria (AUT)
Bahrain (BHR)
Belgium (BEL)
Brazil (BRA)
Canada (CAN)
Czech Republic (CZE)
Denmark (DNK)
Finland (FIN)
France (FRA)
Germany (DEU)
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
87
Stages Reference
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Greece (GRC) (Does not include POI information)
Hungary (HUN)
Ireland (IRL)
Italy (ITA)
Japan (JPN)
Kuwait (KWT)
Liechtenstein (LIE)
Luxembourg (LUX)
Mexico (MEX)
Netherlands (NLD)
New Zealand (NZL) (Does not include POI information)
Norway (NOR)
Oman (OMN)
Poland (POL)
Portugal (PRT)
Qatar (QAT)
Russia (RUS)
Saudi Arabia (SAU)
Singapore (SGP)
Slovakia (SVK)
Slovenia (SVN)
South Africa (ZAF)
Spain (ESP)
Sweden (SWE)
Switzerland (CHE)
Thailand (THA)
Turkey (TUR)
United Arab Emirates (ARE)
United Kingdom (GBR)
United States (USA)
Note:
See the current Database Release Notes for more details of country coverage and data
vintages.
Using Global Type Ahead
After installing and deploying the Global Addressing Module, you can use Global Type Ahead:
• As a service from Management Console
• As a stage from Enterprise Designer
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
88
Stages Reference
Using Global Type Ahead As a Service
To use Global Type Ahead as a service from Management Console:
1. Open the Management Console.
2. Under the Services tab, select Global Addressing.
3. From the list of services on the left side of the pane, select Global Type Ahead.
4. On the Database Resources tab, specify the Global Type Ahead database resource to use.
5. Click Save to save your database selection.
6. Click the Default Options tab.
7. On the Default Options tab, specify the options you want. For information on the options, see
Options on page 90.
8. If you make changes to the global default options, click Save to save those changes. Any
changes you make to the global default options are also applied to Global Type Ahead in
Enterprise Designer.
9. Click the Preview tab.
10. In the AddressLine1 field, enter the complete first line of the address, typically including street
and house number.
11. In the Country field, enter the country name or the two or three-character ISO country code. If
you omit the country, Global Type Ahead returns the best available candidates for the Default
Country selected on the Default Options tab. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes
and Module Support on page 284.
12. Click Run Preview.
13. In Preview Output Records on the right side of the pane, note that the results of the search
have been placed in the appropriate output field. For information on the output fields, see Output
on page 91.
Using Global Type Ahead As a Stage
You can use Global Type Ahead as a stage from Enterprise Designer to perform address validation
as a batch process. For more information about creating a job using Global Type Ahead as a stage,
see:
•
•
•
•
My First Dataflow (Job) in the Dataflow Designer Guide
Input on page 89
Options on page 90
Output on page 91
Input
Global Type Ahead automatically suggests addresses as you type and immediately returns candidates
based on your input. Global Type Ahead can also return Points of Interest (POI).
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
89
Stages Reference
Note: The POI data must be purchased separately. POI and category/subcategory features
are available only if you have licensed and installed POI data. Street address data is packaged
with the Global Addressing Module.
Table 31: Global Type Ahead Input
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String
The complete first line of the address, typically including street and
house number.
Country
String
The country name or the two or three-character ISO country code. If
you omit the country, Global Type Ahead returns the best available
candidates for the Default Country selected on the Default Options tab.
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support
on page 284 .
Options
Global Type Ahead uses the default options settings to define address retrieval processing.
Table 32: Global Type Ahead Options
Option Name
Country Description
Support
Database
All
The database to use for Global Type Ahead processing. Only databases
that have been defined in the Database Resources panel in the
Management Console are available.
Default Country
All
The default country for address match processing.
Search type
All
The Global Type Ahead search options:
Max candidates
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
All
Both
Search all to include both street addresses and
points of interest (POI).
Address
Search for street addresses.
POI
Search for Points of Interest (POI).
The maximum number of search candidates returned. The maximum is
50. The default is 5.
Addressing Guide
90
Stages Reference
Option Name
Fuzzy match
Country Description
Support
All
Global Type Ahead implements algorithms that optimize the retrieval of
addresses and POIs, even when the input spelling is incorrect or
incomplete. These capabilities are referred to as Fuzzy Match, and are
implemented through match setting constraints.
None
Fuzzy Match is disabled by default.
Hard Match
The hard match allows one character substitution,
insertion, deletion, or transposition.
Soft Match
The soft match allows two character substitutions,
insertions, deletions, or transpositions.
Output
Global Type Ahead output is determined by the output options you selected.
Returned candidates can be previewed in the Management Console. Candidates include the complete
address elements that you expect to see in Spectrum™ Technology Platform candidates, such as
AddressLine, City, County, State, and Country.
Table 33: Global Type Ahead Output
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String
The complete first line of the address, typically including street and
house number.
City
String
The city or town name.
County
String
The county name.
Country
String
The country name.
FirmName
String
The name of a company.
LastLine
String
The last line of the address. For example, 10 DOWNING STREET
LONDON, SW1A 2AA.
Locality
String
The locality.
PostalCode
String
The postal code for the address. The format of the postal code varies
by country.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
91
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StateProvince
String
The name of one of the state or province depending on the country.
Type
String
Returns 1 for a POI match. Returns 2 for a street address match. POI
and category/subcategory features are available only if you have licensed
and installed POI data. You must have a license for POI data to include
it and be able to return candidates for the dictionary.
Global Address Parser
Global Address Parser splits postal address strings into their constituent elements, such as name
of organization, city, locality, district, and post code, using the machine learning techniques. It is a
part of the Global Addressing Module.
You can feed data to the Global Address Parser in these two ways:
• Enter addresses one at a time using the Management Console
• Import a comma-separated file of addresses arranged in a single column and having a header
such as address in the Management Console or alternatively use any data source stage in the
Enterprise Designer
This example shows an input address string and the corresponding formatted output:
Input address string and formatted output
Input string
"Pitney Bowes Ltd Unit 5 Hatfield Business Park Mosquito Way
Hatfield Hertfordshire AL10 9UJ GBR"
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
92
Stages Reference
Features of Global Address Parser
Global Address Parser has these features:
• Splits and formats address strings into its components with the help of models trained through
machine learning.
• Parses addresses in Roman script and accepts input addresses in Roman script. Few Greek
alphabets are also supported.
• Currently supports parsing for two countries, Germany and United Kingdom.
• Handles country-specific addressing conventions efficiently. Address components of different
countries vary in many ways. For example, in German addresses house number usually comes
after the street name and the post code comes before the city. Global Address Parser handles all
these complexities efficiently and predicts the address components in accordance with the
conventions of the specified country.
• Does away with the need of reference address databases for parsing.
Guidelines to Improve Prediction Accuracy
In order to get the most accurate prediction of address components, your input address strings
should adhere to these patterns.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
93
Stages Reference
Guidelines for United Kingdom Addresses
Avoid non-address
components
Presence of non-address components in the input string might lead
to wrong prediction. Remove such components before feeding the
string for prediction.
Maintain a sequence in
address components
The address components should be placed in this order:
OrganizationName > Floor > PlaceName > AddressNumber >
Street > Neighbourhood > City/Suburb/County > PostCode >
Country.
Example:
Remove redundant
address components
•
Pitney Bowes Limited London Milenium street Unit 3 AB10 3DF
GBR
•
Pitney Bowes Limited Unit 3 Milenium street London AB10 3DF
GBR
The input address string should not have repeated address
components, such as two different organization names or repetitive
name of an organization in one string.
Example:
•
Pitney Bowes Limited Pitney Bowes Limited Unit 10 Logix Cyber
Park 10 Manor Street London AB10 3DF GBR
Follow single-token
A single-token organization name should be followed by the type of
organization names with the organization, such as Ltd, Inc, and Reg. In the example below,
organization type
Ardian is a single-token organization name. In this case, the
organization name is not followed by the type "Limited," and the results
may be inaccurate.
Example:
•
Ardian Fourth Floor Channel House St Helier Je2 4UH GBR
•
Ardian Limited Fourth Floor Channel House St Helier Je2 4UH
GBR
Limitations in United Kingdom Addresses
An address string of any of these kind is susceptible to getting inaccurately predicted by the address
parser. Watch out for these in your address strings.
Presence of another address
component as name of the
organization
If the name of the organization includes any other address
component, such as Floor, Flat, and House, the prediction
accuracy may be affected.
Example:
Flat Seasons 632 Kings Road London Middlesex
SW6 2DU GBR
Organization name having
numbers
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
If an organization name has numbers, it is susceptible to getting
erroneously predicted.
Addressing Guide
94
Stages Reference
Example:
123 Limited ABC Street AB10 3DF GBR
Guidelines for German Addresses
Avoid non-address
components
Presence of non-address components in the input string might lead
to wrong prediction. Remove such components before feeding the
string for prediction.
Maintain a sequence in
address components
The address components should be placed in this order:
OrganizationName > Floor > PlaceName > AddressNumber >
Street > Neighbourhood > City/Suburb/County > PostCode >
Country.
Example:
Remove redundant
address components
•
3 Weseler Strasse 46514 Schermbeck DEU
•
Weseler Strasse 3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
The input address string should not have repeated address
components, such as two different organization names or repetitive
name of an organization in one string.
Example:
DEU
Weseler Strasse 3 Weseler Strasse 46514 Schermbeck
Ensure address number and Your address string needs to have address number and street
street name are included
name. Missing out these essential address components will impact
the accuracy of the result.
Example:
•
46514 Schermbeck DEU
•
Weseler Strasse 3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
Do not have merged components Merged address components result in incorrect prediction.
in address strings
Example:
Avoid addressee name in
the string
Do not have bracketed "()"
address component
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
•
Weseler-Strasse-3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
•
Weseler Strasse 3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
Address name in the string results in incorrect prediction for the
German addresses.
Example:
•
Mr John Doe Weseler Strasse 3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
•
Weseler Strasse 3 46514 Schermbeck DEU
Including any of your address components inside brackets
"()" will leave it unparsed.
Addressing Guide
95
Stages Reference
Example:
Weseler Strasse 3 46514 (Schermbeck) DEU
Accessing Global Address Parser
When you install and deploy the Global Addressing Module you will be able to use the Global Address
Parser in these two ways:
• As a stage from the Enterprise Designer
• As a service from the Management Console
Using the Address Parser screen you can perform these tasks:
1. Set the parsing options: Specify the country to which the addresses belong and the minimum
confidence level required for parsing.
2. Parse addresses: Feed the address strings and get the parsed output.
Note: For details on how to perform these tasks, see the sections Using Global Address
Parser as Stage on page 96 and Using Global Address Parser as Service on page 97.
Using Global Address Parser as Stage
You can use Global Address Parser as an address parsing stage in your job. In this case, you can
only perform batch address parsing.
To parse a batch of input address strings you need to append the Global Address Parser stage with
an input and an output stage, as shown in the example below.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
96
Stages Reference
Note: For details on creating a job using any stage in the Enterprise Designer, see My First
Dataflow (Job) in the Dataflow Designer Guide.
This table displays the Global Address Parser options.
Table 34: Global Address Parser Options
Field Name
Description
Override system default option with the Select this check-box to change the default options.
following values
Default Options
Country
Select the country to which the addresses to be parsed belong. The options are:
United Kingdom and Germany.
Minimum confidence score
On a scale of 0 to 100, assign the minimum confidence the parser should have
on the result to display it.
Note: Parsing results having a confidence score lesser than specified
here are not displayed as output.
Note: For details on the output fields, see Parsed Address Output on page 99.
Using Global Address Parser as Service
Global Address Parser needs you to perform these steps for splitting your address strings into their
respective components:
• Setting the parsing options
• Feeding input addresses to be parsed
To access the Global Address Parser screen and perform address parsing, follow these steps:
1. In a web browser, go to:
http://server:port/managementconsole
Where server is the server name or IP address of your Spectrum™ Technology Platform server
and port is the HTTP port. By default, the HTTP port is 8080.
2. Log in with your credentials.
3. Under the Services tab, select Global Addressing.
4. From the list of services on the left side of the pane, select Global Address Parser.
The Global Address Parser screen is displayed with the Default Options tab selected.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
97
Stages Reference
5. Select the Country to which the addresses you are parsing belong.
Note: You can parse addresses of United Kingdom and Germany only.
6. Assign the Minimum confidence score you want for this parsing. The parser will not display
results that fall below the confidence score you specify here.
7. Click Save.
The options specified are saved for the next operation, which is: Entering the addresses to be
parsed.
8. Click the Preview tab.
9. Click one of these icons to feed the address that needs to be parsed.
• To add records one at a time to the parser, perform these tasks:
1. Click the Add record button .
2. In the Address field of the Input Record <sequence of the address record> section,
enter the address string to be parsed.
Note: Repeat steps 'a' and 'b' to add multiple address strings. You can add up to
100 address strings.
• To import multiple addresses from a CSV file, click the Import records button
Data pop-up window that is displayed, enter these values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
. In the Import
In the File name field, select the file that has the address records.
Select the Field separator used in the address file.
Specify the Maximum number of records to import.
Click OK .
The entered or selected address records are displayed as input records below the Run Preview
button.
Note: The input address string should have more than one token. For example, an input
address string with London as the only value will not be recognized by the parser. An
address need to have at least one more token (or component) to the string, such as city
name, place name, or post code.
10. To delete any of the address strings, hover the cursor on the corresponding Input Record
<sequence of the address record> and click the Delete this record icon
Note: To delete all records, click Delete all records
that is displayed.
icon placed below Input Records.
11. To view parsed output, click the Run Preview button.
The parsed address components (Output Record) are displayed adjacent to the corresponding
input records. For details on the output fields, see Parsed Address Output on page 99.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
98
Stages Reference
Parsed Address Output
The parsed output displays a list of all the address components along with their values in the input
address strings. The components for United Kingdom and Germany are not identical. The table
below gives a description of all the address components, the values the components can take, and
if those are applicable for German and UK addresses.
Note: The values of some address components can be interchanged in the output:
• For German addresses: Suburb, City, County and StateProvince can be interchanged.
• For United Kingdom addresses: City, Suburb and Neighbourhood can be interchanged.
Table 35: Address components, definition, and validity
Address
components
Valid for
Valid for UK Accepted and parsed values
German
Addresses
Addresses
OrganizationName
Yes
Yes
Name of organization, hospital, institute, school, and bank
Floor
-
Yes
Apartment number, sub-building information, floor, suite, and flat
number
PlaceName
-
Yes
Landmark, building, building name, cluster name, society name,
residential and commercial complex, and special economic zone
AddressNumber
Yes
Yes
Building number, address number on streets
Street
Yes
Yes
Name of thoroughfare
Yes
Small subdivision of a locality, city, or town
Neighbourhood
City
Yes
Yes
Suburb
Yes
Yes
County
Yes
Yes
PostCode
Yes
Yes
Series of letters and/or digits assigned to geographical areas
primarily for sorting mails. Post Code sometimes also includes
spaces or punctuation.
POBox
Yes
Yes
A lockable box having a unique address. It is located on the
premises of a post office station.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Name of village, city, district, or suburb, per the geographical
division of the country. These elements together constitute location
information.
Addressing Guide
99
Stages Reference
Address
components
Valid for
Valid for UK Accepted and parsed values
German
Addresses
Addresses
StateProvince
Yes
-
Largest geographical entity with respect to a country
Country
Yes
Yes
Name of the country
Note: All the components listed in the table may not be displayed for all the input addresses.
For a component to display, the input string should have a value for it.
Universal Addressing Module
Universal Addressing Module
The Universal Addressing Module is an address quality module that can standardize and validate
addresses, improving the deliverability of mail. The Universal Addressing Module can ensure that
your address data adheres to quality standards established by the postal authority. An address that
adheres to these standards is more likely to be delivered in a timely manner. In addition, mailers
who follow these standards can qualify for significant postage discounts. For information on discounts
for U.S. mail, refer to the USPS Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) available at www.usps.com. For
information on discounts for Canadian mail, refer to the Canada Post website at www.canadapost.ca.
For information on discounts for Australian mail, refer to the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au.
The Universal Addressing Module can be used in batch mode, realtime mode, or as a hosted service,
depending on which option you have licensed. The batch version of the Universal Addressing Module
is CASS Certified™ by the USPS®. It is also AMAS certified by Australia Post.
The Universal Addressing Module is one of two address quality modules available for Spectrum™
Technology Platform. The other address quality module, the Address Now Module, provides enhanced
support for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, including validation for more countries and
double-byte support. If you have a large amount of international address data, you may want to
consider using the Address Now Module for address standardization and validation.
Components
The Universal Addressing Module consists of the following components. These components can
work with U.S., Canadian, Australian, and international addresses as long as you are licensed for
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
100
Stages Reference
the appropriate database (if you are running Universal Addressing in your own environment) or
hosted service (if you are utilizing Universal Addressing through the Pitney Bowes hosted services).
• Auto Complete Loqate—Offers real-time entry of address data and returns instant results based
on each character entered into the form, ensuring only accurate data is entered into the database.
• Get Candidate Addresses—Returns a list of possible matches for a given address.
• Get Candidate Addresses Loqate—Returns a list of possible matches for a given address using
a Loqate engine and database.
• Get City State Province—Returns the city and state or province for a given postal code.
• Get City State Province Loqate—Returns the city and state or province for a given postal code
using a Loqate engine and database.
• Get Postal Codes—Returns the postal codes for a given city.
• Get Postal Codes Loqate—Returns the postal codes for a given city using a Loqate engine and
database.
• Validate Address—Standardizes and validates addresses using U.S., Canadian, and international
postal data.
• Validate Address AUS—Standardizes and validates addresses using Australian postal data.
• Validate Address Global—Validate Address Global provides enhanced address standardization
and validation for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada. Validate Address Global can also
validate addresses in the U.S. and Canada but its strength is validation of addresses in other
countries. If you process a significant number of addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, you
should consider using Validate Address Global.
• Validate Address Loqate—Validate Address Loqate standardizes and validates addresses using
postal authority address data. Validate Address Loqate can correct information and format the
address using the format preferred by the applicable postal authority. It also adds missing postal
information, such as postal codes, city names, and state or province names.
Universal Addressing Databases
The Universal Addressing Module uses a number of required and optional databases. The databases
are installed on the Spectrum™ Technology Platform server. Some of the databases are available
by subscription from Pitney Bowes and are updated monthly or quarterly. Others are licensed from
the USPS®. The following table lists the Universal Addressing databases.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
101
Stages Reference
Table 36: Universal Addressing Module Databases
Database Name & Description
Required or
Optional
Supplier
U.S. Postal Database
Required for U.S.
address processing
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
The U.S. Postal Database is in a Pitney Bowes proprietary format. It
contains every house number range in the United States and is updated
on a monthly basis. The database files contain the following information:
• ZIP + 4® Code
• Standardized address elements
• City and state information
The U.S. Postal Database also contains the data needed to perform
Enhanced Street Matching (ESM) and All Street Matching (ASM). ESM
and ASM apply extra matching logic to any input address that is not
matched through the regular address validation process.
Canadian Postal Database
The Canadian Postal database is in Pitney Bowes proprietary format.
The database files contain the following information:
Required for Canadian Pitney Bowes monthly
address processing
subscription
• Postal code
• Standardized address elements
• Municipality and province information
International Postal Database
Required for
International address
The International Postal Database is a collection of postal address data
processing
from around the world. Data from each country is categorized according
to the level of data available. The categories are:
Pitney Bowes
quarterly subscription
• Category A—Enables the validation and correction of an address's
postal code, city name, state/county name, street address elements,
and country name.
• Category B—Enables the validation and correction of an address's
postal code, city name, state/county name, and country name. It does
not support the validation or correction of street address elements.
• Category C—Enables the validation and correction of the country
name, and the validation of the format of the postal code.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
102
Stages Reference
Database Name & Description
Required or
Optional
DPV® Database
Optional, but required
for CASS Certified™
The Delivery Point Validation database allows you to check the validity
processing; U.S.
of an individual mailing address in the U.S. The DPV database enhances
addresses only
the U.S. Postal database's ability to validate mailing addresses.
Supplier
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
Note: The DPV database also contains the data required for
Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) processing.
Each time an edition of the U.S. Postal database is released, a
corresponding edition of the DPV database is released. Although USPS
licensing allows the use of the U.S. Postal database beyond the
expiration date (with certain restrictions), DPV lookups may not be
performed after the expiration date of the DPV database.
USPS licensing prohibits using DPV data for the generation of addresses
or address lists. To prevent the generation of address lists, the DPV
database contains "false positive records." False positive records are
artificially manufactured addresses. For each negative response that
occurs in a DPV query, a query is made to the False/Positive table in
the DPV database. A match to this table will stop DPV processing.
USPS licensing also prohibits exporting the DPV data outside the United
States.
eLOT® Database
The Enhanced Line of Travel ( eLOT) database is a U.S. address
database that ensures that Enhanced Carrier Route mailings are sorted
as close as possible to the actual delivery sequence. the eLOT database
is required for certain types of postal discounts.
Optional; U.S.
addresses only
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
You will receive monthly updates to your eLOT database on the same
media as the U.S. Postal database.
You must install the U.S. Postal database and eLOT database from the
same month (i.e., September eLOT data must be processed with a
September U.S. Postal database). If the U.S. Postal database and the
eLOT database are not from the same month, there may be ZIP + 4®
Codes for which eLOT numbers cannot be assigned. The ZIP Code™,
ZIP + 4 Code, carrier route code, and the delivery point of an address
must be provided to assign a eLOT code.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
103
Stages Reference
Database Name & Description
Required or
Optional
Supplier
EWS Database
Optional; U.S.
addresses only
Download for free from
USPS® website
The Early Warning System (EWS) database prevents address validation
errors that can result due to a delay in postal data reaching the U.S.
Postal database.
The EWS database consists of partial address information limited to
the ZIP Code™, street name, pre- and post-directionals, and a suffix.
For an address record to be EWS-eligible, it must be an address not
present on the most recent monthly production U.S. Postal database.
The USPS® refreshes the EWS file on a weekly basis (Thursdays). You
can download the EWS file from the USPS® website at ribbs.usps.gov.
Link®
LACS
Database
Optional, but required
for CASS Certified™
The LACS
database allows you to correct addresses that have
processing; U.S.
changed as a result of a rural route address converting to street-style
addresses only
address, a PO Box renumbering, or a street-style address changing.
Link
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
Link
USPS licensing prohibits using LACS
for the generation of addresses
Link
or address lists. To prevent the generation of address lists, the LACS
database contains "false positive records." False positive records are
artificially manufactured addresses. For each negative response that
Link
occurs in a LACS
query, a query is made to the False/Positive table
Link
Link
in the LACS
database. A match to this table will stop LACS
processing.
Link
USPS licensing also prohibits exporting the LACS
the United States
database outside
RDI™ Database
The Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI™) file processing determines
whether an address is a residential, business, or mixed (residential
and/or business) address.
Optional; U.S.
addresses only
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
RDI is similar to DPV. In RDI, data is supplied as hash tables. However,
RDI is a much simpler process than DPV. In DPV, the standard hash
algorithm is determined only for the 9-digit and 11-digit ZIP Code™
rather than the entire address.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
104
Stages Reference
Database Name & Description
Link™
Suite
Database
Link™
Suite
corrects secondary address information for U.S. business
addresses whose secondary address information could not be validated.
Link
If Suite
processing is enabled, Validate Address attempts to match
the value in the FirmName field to a database of known firm names.
Validate Address then supplies the correct secondary address
information.
Required or
Optional
Supplier
Optional; U.S.
addresses only
Pitney Bowes monthly
subscription
Auto Complete Loqate
Auto Complete Loqate offers real-time entry of address data for fast, accurate results. Users are
returned instant results based on each character entered into the form, ensuring only accurate data
is entered into the database. Auto Complete Loqate also includes the Powersearch option, which
reduces input time by up to 80% for 238 countries by using data in the form of an index file.
Input
The following table lists the input for Auto Complete Loqate.
Table 37: Input Format
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
City
The city name.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
105
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Country
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
• 2-digit ISO country code
• 3-digit UPU Country code
• English country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
The company or firm name.
PostalCode
The postal code for the address.
StateProvince
The state or province.
Options
Table 38: Auto Complete Loqate Options
Option Name
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for address processing. Only databases that have
been defined in the Database Resources panel in the Management Console are
available.
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the following:
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For example:
123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example:
123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
106
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Default country
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where most of your
addresses reside. For example, if most of the addresses you process are in Germany,
specify Germany.
Country format
Specifies the format to use for the country name returned in the Country output
field. For example, if you select English, the country name "Deutschland" would be
returned as "Germany".
Script/Alphabet
Maximum records to return
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
English Names
Use English country names (default).
ISO Codes
Use two-letter ISO abbreviation for the countries instead
of country names.
UPU Codes
Use Universal Postal Union abbreviation for the countries
instead of country names.
Specifies the alphabet or script in which the output should be returned. This option
is bi-directional and generally takes place from Native to Latin and Latin to Native.
Input Script
Do not perform transliteration and provide output in the
same script as the input (default).
Native
Output in the native script for the selected country
wherever possible.
Latin (English)
Use English values.
The maximum number of addresses that Auto Complete Loqate should return. The
default is 10.
Addressing Guide
107
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Prefer Powersearch
Reduces input time by up to 80% for 240 countries by using data in the form of an
index file. When you conduct a search, the Loqate Engine will first look for the
corresponding index. If present, the method will attempt to instantly return a list of
candidate addresses. If the index is not present, or if the index does not return any
results, the original search process will be triggered.
Note: Powersearch can be performed when there are two and only two
fields in the input file: the Country field and any one of the AddressLine
fields. If you select this option and your input file contains additional fields,
the original search process will automatically be triggered.
To conduct its search, Auto Complete indexes use up to the first 10 characters for
searches within the United States and up to the first 15 characters for searches
within all other eligible countries. Spaces and punctuation are not factored into this
count.
Powersearch cannot be used for the following countries: Botswana, Ethiopia, India,
Kazakhstan, Malaysia, Mongolia, Saint Kitts and Nevis, and San Marino.
Note: You must have a valid license for Powersearch processing. If you
enable Powersearch processing but are not licensed for this feature, or if
your license has expired, your entire job will fail.
Duplicate handling
Data license error handling
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Enables the duplicate handling mask and specifies how duplicate records are
processed and removed. Select one or more of the following options:
Single
Selected by default. Pre-process the input and remove
duplicates that occur in a single field.
Multi
Selected by default. Pre-process the input and remove
duplicates across all fields.
Non-standard
Pre-process the input and remove duplicates in fields that are
not standard address fields.
Output
Selected by default. Post-process the output from verification
and remove duplicates from non-verified fields.
Specifies how you want Spectrum Technology Platform to respond when a data
license error occurs.
Fail the job
Fail the entire job if a data license error occurs.
Fail the record
Fail the record(s) for which the data license error occurs
and continue processing.
Addressing Guide
108
Stages Reference
Output
The output from Auto Complete Loqate is optional and corresponds directly to the fields you selected
in the Output Fields section of the Auto Complete Loqate Options dialog box.
Table 39: Auto Complete Loqate Output
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
City
The city name.
Country
The three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 code for the country. For a list of ISO codes,
see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
The firm name.
HouseNumber
The ending house number for the range in which the candidate address's house
number falls.
PostalCode
The postal code.
PostalCode.AddOn
The last four digits of the ZIP + 4® Code.
ProcessedBy
Indicates which address coder processed the address.
LOQATE
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
The Loqate coder processed the address.
109
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StateProvince
The state or province abbreviation.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
The reason for failure, if there is one.
• DisabledCoder
• RequestFailed
• NoLookupAddressFound
Status.Description
A description of the problem, if there is one.
Did not return multiples
The input address matched only one address in the
database. Auto Complete Loqate returns data only
if multiple possible matches were found.
Not able to look up the
address pattern
Auto Complete Loqate is not able to process the
partial address.
Get Candidate Addresses
Get Candidate Addresses returns a list of addresses that are considered matches for a given input
address. Get Candidate Addresses returns candidate addresses only if the input address matches
multiple addresses in the postal database. If the input address matches only one address in the
postal database, then no address data is returned.
For addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, you may notice inconsistent results between the
multiple matches returned by Validate Address and the results for that same address returned by
Get Candidate Addresses. If you experience inconsistent results, it is likely because you set the
performance tuning setting in Validate Address to a value other than 100. To obtain consistent
results between Get Candidate Addresses and Validate Address, set the performance tuning option
to 100.
Note: By default, Get Candidate Addresses does not match to individual house numbers.
Rather, it uses house number ranges for each street. After Get Candidate Addresses has
determined the street name, city name, state/province name, and postal code, it checks to
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
110
Stages Reference
make sure the input house number falls within one of the ranges of house numbers given for
the matched street name. The same type of logic applies to unit numbers. If you want to
determine that an individual house number is valid, you should use the Validate Address
Delivery Point Validation (DPV) processing option. DPV processing is only available for U.S.
addresses.
The Canadian coder contains a reverse lookup routine that takes as input a specific postal code
and returns the street information stored in the database for that postal code. To use this function
enter nothing but a Canadian postal code in the PostalCode field. See the second example to view
the return from a sample postal code.
Get Candidate Addresses is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
U.S. Address Example
AddressLine1: PO Box 1 City: NY State: NY
Canadian Address Example
PostalCode: A1A1A1
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
111
Stages Reference
Input
The following table lists the input for Get Candidate Addresses.
Table 40: Input Format
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
Does not apply to U.S. and Canadian addresses.
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
Does not apply to U.S. and Canadian addresses.
AddressLine5
The fifth address line.
Applies only to U.K. addresses. May contain street name, unit number, building
number, and so on.
City
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
The city name.
Addressing Guide
112
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StateProvince
The state or province.
For U.S. addresses only, you may put the state in the City field instead of the
StateProvince field.
PostalCode
The postal code for the address. For U.S. addresses this is the ZIP Code™ in one
of the following formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Note: For Canadian addresses you can complete just this field and have
candidate address data returned. For other countries, AddressLine1 and
AddressLine2 must also be completed.
Country
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-digit ISO country code
3-digit UPU Country code
English country name
French country name
German country name
Spanish country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
The company or firm name.
USUrbanName
U.S. address urbanization name. Used primarily for Puerto Rico addresses.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
113
Stages Reference
Options
Table 41: Get Candidate Addresses Options
Option Name
Description
Enable U.S. address processing
Specifies whether or not to process U.S. addresses. If you enable U.S.
address processing Get Candidate Addresses will attempt to retrieve
candidate addresses for U.S. addresses. If you disable U.S. address
processing, U.S. addresses will fail, meaning they are returned with an
"F" in the Status output field. The output field Status.Code will say
"DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for U.S. address processing
you must disable U.S. address processing in order for your jobs to
complete successfully, regardless of whether or not they contain U.S.
addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for U.S. address
processing to successfully process U.S. addresses. If you
enable U.S. address processing but are not licensed for this
feature, or your license has expired, your entire job will fail.
Database
Specifies the database to be used for U.S. address processing. Only
databases that have been defined in the US Database Resources
panel in the Management Console are available.
Enable Canadian address processing
Specifies whether or not to process Canadian addresses. If you enable
Canadian address processing Get Candidate Addresses will attempt to
retrieve candidate addresses for Canadian addresses. If you disable
Canadian address processing, Canadian addresses will fail, meaning
they are returned with an "F" in the Status output field. The output field
Status.Code will say "DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for
Canadian address processing you must disable Canadian address
processing in order for your jobs to complete successfully, regardless
of whether or not they contain Canadian addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for Canadian address
processing to successfully process Canadian addresses. If you
enable Canadian address processing but are not licensed for
this feature, or your license has expired, your entire job will fail.
Database
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies the database to be used for Canadian address processing.
Only databases that have been defined in the Canadian Database
Resources panel in the Management Console are available.
Addressing Guide
114
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Enable International address processing
Specifies whether or not to process international addresses (addresses
outside the U.S. and Canada). If you enable international address
processing Get Candidate Addresses will attempt to retrieve candidate
addresses for international addresses. If you disable international
address processing, international addresses will fail, meaning they are
returned with an "F" in the Status output field. The output field
Status.Code will say "DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for
international address processing you must disable international address
processing in order for your jobs to complete successfully, regardless
of whether or not they contain international addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for international address
processing to successfully process international addresses. If
you enable international address processing but are not
licensed for this feature, or your license has expired, your entire
job will fail.
Database
Specifies the database to be used for international address processing.
Only databases that have been defined in the International Database
Resources panel in the Management Console are available.
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the following:
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For
example:
123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example:
123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Maximum records to return
The maximum number of candidate addresses that Get Candidate
Addresses should return. The default is 10. The maximum is 10.
Return short city name
For U.S. addresses, specifies whether or not to return the
USPS®-approved abbreviation for the city, if there is one. The USPS®
provides abbreviations for city names that are 14 characters long or
longer. City abbreviations are 13 characters or less and can be used
when there is limited space on the mailing label. If there is no short city
name for the city, then the full city name is returned.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
115
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Dual address match logic
(U.S. addresses only). Controls whether Get Candidate Addresses
should return a street match or a PO Box/Rural Route/Highway Contract
match when the address contains both street and PO Box/Rural
Route/Highway Contract information. For more information, see About
Dual Address Logic on page 149.
Normal Match
®
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Street matching
Firm matching
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
™
(Default) USPS CASS regulations determine
the address returned based on the following order
of priority:
PO Box
Firm
Highrise
Street
Rural Route
General Delivery
Street Match
Return a street match, regardless of the address
line.
PO Box Match
Return a PO Box match, regardless of the address
line.
The strictness of the street name match (U.S. addresses only).
Exact
The input street name must match the database
exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium" (default).
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
The strictness of the firm name match (U.S. addresses only).
Exact
The input firm name must match the database
exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium" (default).
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
Addressing Guide
116
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Directional matching
The strictness of the directional match.
Exact
The input directional must match the database
exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium" (default).
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
Perform enhanced street matching
Specifies whether or not to perform Enhanced Street Matching (ESM).
ESM applies extra matching logic with additional data to any input
address that is not matched through the regular address validation
process. ESM applies to U.S. addresses only.
Search address lines on fail
Specifies whether ValidateAddress will search address lines for the city,
state/province, and postal code.
This option enables Validate Address to search the AddressLine input
fields for the city, state/province, postal code, and country when the
address cannot be matched using the values in the City, StateProvince,
and PostalCode input fields.
Consider enabling this option if your input addresses have the city,
state/province, and postal code information in the AddressLine fields.
Consider disabling this option if your input addresses use the City,
State/Province and PostalCode fields. If you enable this option and
these fields are used, there is an increased possibility that Validate
Address will fail to correct values in these fields (for example a misspelled
city name).
Output
Get Candidate Addresses returns the following output.
Table 42: Get Candidate Addresses Output
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
117
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
AddressLine5
For U.K. addresses only. If the address was validated, the fifth line of the validated
and standardized address. If the address could not be validated, the fifth line of the
input address without any changes.
City
The city name.
Country
The three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 code for the country. For a list of ISO codes,
see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
The firm name.
HouseNumberHigh
The ending house number for the range in which the candidate address's house
number falls.
HouseNumberLow
The beginning house number for the range in which the candidate address's house
number falls.
HouseNumberParity
Indicates the numbering scheme for the house numbers between HouseNumberLow
and HouseNumberHigh, as follows:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
E
Only even values
O
Only odd values
B
Both
Addressing Guide
118
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
MatchLevel
For addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, identifies the match level for the
candidate address. U.S. and Canadian addresses are always "A." One of the
following:
A
The candidate matches the input address at the street level.
B
The candidate matches the input address at the state/province level.
PostalCode
The postal code. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code™.
PostalCode.AddOn
The last four digits of the ZIP + 4® Code. U.S. addresses only.
RecordType
The type of address record, as defined by U.S. and Canadian postal authorities
(U.S. and Canadian addresses only):
•
•
•
•
•
•
RecordType.Default
FirmRecord
GeneralDelivery
HighRise
PostOfficeBox
RRHighwayContract
Normal
Code indicating the "default" match:
Y
The address matches a default record.
null
The address does not match a default record.
StateProvince
The state or province abbreviation.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
The reason for failure, if there is one. There is only one possible value:
• DisabledCoder
• RequestFailed
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
119
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Status.Description
A description of the problem, if there is one.
Did not return multiples
The input address matched only one address
in the database. Get Candidate Addresses only
returns data if multiple possible matches were
found.
Number of candidates is not
greater than 1
The input address matched more than one
address in the database but no addresses were
returned.
PerformUSProcessing disabled This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
PerformCanadianProcessing
disabled
This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
PerformInternationalProcessing This value will appear if
disabled
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
UnitNumberHigh
The ending unit number for the range in which the candidate address's unit number
falls.
UnitNumberLow
The beginning unit number for the range in which the candidate address's unit
number falls.
UnitNumberParity
Indicates the numbering scheme for the unit numbers between UnitNumberLow and
UnitNumberHigh, as follows:
USUrbanName
E
Only even values
O
Only odd values
B
Both
The validated city urbanization name. Urbanization names are used primarily for
Puerto Rico addresses.
Get Candidate Addresses Loqate
Get Candidate Addresses Loqate returns a list of addresses that are considered matches for a given
input address. Get Candidate Addresses Loqate returns candidate addresses only if the input
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
120
Stages Reference
address matches multiple addresses in the postal database. If the input address matches only one
address in the postal database, then no address data is returned. The Country input field is required;
if this field is blank, no output will be returned.
Note: By default, Get Candidate Addresses Loqate does not match to individual house
numbers. Rather, it uses house number ranges for each street. After Get Candidate Addresses
Loqate has determined the street name, city name, state/province name, and postal code, it
checks to make sure the input house number falls within one of the ranges of house numbers
given for the matched street name. The same type of logic applies to unit numbers.
Get Candidate Addresses Loqate is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
PostalCode: A1A1A1
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
121
Stages Reference
Input
The following table lists the input for Get Candidate Addresses Loqate.
Table 43: Input Format
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
City
The city name.
Country
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
• 2-digit ISO country code
• 3-digit UPU Country code
• English country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
Note: This field is required. If this field is blank, no output will be returned.
FirmName
The company or firm name.
PostalCode
The postal code for the address. For U.S. addresses this is the ZIP Code™ in one
of the following formats:
StateProvince
The state or province.
For U.S. addresses only, you may put the state in the City field instead of the
StateProvince field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
122
Stages Reference
Options
Table 44: Get Candidate Addresses Loqate Options
Option Name
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for address processing. Only databases that have
been defined in the Management Console are available.
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the following:
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For example:
123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example:
123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Address Lookup Process
Default Country
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies the method of searching for candidates. One of the following:
Search
Enter a full or partial address as input and return as output a list of
closely matching results (default).
Verify
Enter address information in address lines, address components,
or a combination of both as input and return as output results that
more closely match the input.
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where most of your
addresses reside. For example, if most of the addresses you process are in Germany,
specify Germany. Get Candidate Address Loqate uses the country you specify to
attempt validation when it cannot determine the country from the StateProvince,
PostalCode, and Country address fields.
Addressing Guide
123
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Country format
Specifies the format to use for the country name returned in the Country output
field. For example, if you select English, the country name "Deutschland" would be
returned as "Germany".
Script/Alphabet
Maximum records to return
English Names
Use English country names (default).
ISO Codes
Use two-letter ISO abbreviation for the countries instead
of country names.
UPU Codes
Use Universal Postal Union abbreviation for the countries
instead of country names.
Specifies the alphabet or script in which the output should be returned. This option
is bi-directional and generally takes place from Native to Latin and Latin to Native.
Input Script
Do not perform transliteration and provide output in the
same script as the input (default).
Native
Output in the native script for the selected country
wherever possible.
Latin (English)
Use English values.
The maximum number of candidate addresses that Get Candidate Addresses Loqate
should return. The default is 10. The maximum is 99.
Output
Get Candidate Addresses Loqate returns the following output.
Table 45: Get Candidate Addresses Loqate Output
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
The first address line.
AddressLine2
The second address line.
AddressLine3
The third address line.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
124
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
AddressLine4
The fourth address line.
City
The city name.
Country
The three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 code for the country. For a list of ISO codes,
see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
The firm name.
PostalCode
The postal code. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code™.
PostalCode.AddOn
The last four digits of the ZIP + 4® Code. U.S. addresses only.
ProcessedBy
Indicates which address coder processed the address.
LOQATE
The Loqate coder processed the address.
StateProvince
The state or province abbreviation.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
The reason for failure, if there is one. There is only one possible value:
• RequestFailed
Status.Description
A description of the problem, if there is one. There is only one possible value:
Did not return
multiples
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
The input address matched only one address in the
database. Get Candidate Addresses Loqate only returns
data if multiple possible matches were found.
125
Stages Reference
Get City State Province
Get City State Province returns a city and state/province for a given input postal code.
Note: Get City State Province works with U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
Get City State Province is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
The following table shows the input fields.
Table 46: Get City State Province Input
Field Name
Description
PostalCode
A U.S. ZIP Code™ or Canadian postal code in one of the following formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
Options
Table 47: Get City State Province Options
Option Name
Description
Enable U.S. address processing
Specifies whether or not to process U.S. addresses. If you enable U.S. address
processing Get City State Province will attempt to return the state for U.S. addresses.
If you disable U.S. address processing, U.S. addresses will fail, meaning they are
returned with an "F" in the Status output field. The output field Status.Code will say
"DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for U.S. address processing you must
disable U.S. address processing in order for your jobs to complete successfully,
regardless of whether or not they contain U.S. addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for U.S. address processing to
successfully process U.S. addresses.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
126
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for U.S. address processing. Only databases that
have been defined in the US Database Resources panel in the Management
Console are available.
Enable Canadian address
processing
Specifies whether or not to process Canadian addresses. If you enable Canadian
address processing Get City State Province will attempt to return the province for
Canadian addresses. If you disable Canadian address processing, Canadian
addresses will fail, meaning they are returned with an "F" in the Status output field.
The output field Status.Code will say "DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for
Canadian address processing you must disable Canadian address processing in
order for your jobs to complete successfully, regardless of whether or not they contain
Canadian addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for Canadian address processing to
successfully process Canadian addresses.
Database
Specifies the database to be used for Canadian address processing. Only databases
that have been defined in the Canadian Database Resources panel in the
Management Console are available.
Include non-mailing city
Specifies whether or not to include non-mailing city names in the output. A
non-mailing city name is an alternate name for the primary city name. For example,
Hollywood is a non-mailing city name for Los Angeles.
Maximum records to return
Specifies the maximum number of city-state/province pairs to return. The default
value is 10.
Output
Get City State Province returns the matching city and state/province for the input postal code as
well as a code to indicate the success or failure of the match attempt. If more than one city/state or
city/province matches the input postal code, multiple output records are returned.
Table 48: Get City State Province Output
Field Name
Description
City
The matched city name.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
127
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
City.Type
The USPS® standardized city name type (U.S. addresses only).
V
Vanity (non-mailing) city name.
P
Primary. The city name is the primary mailing city name.
S
Secondary. The city name is an alternate city name but is acceptable.
A city can have multiple secondary city names.
PostalCode
The input postal code.
ProcessedBy
Indicates which address coder processed the address. One of the following:
USA
The U.S. address coder processed the address.
CAN
The Canadian address coder processed the address.
StateProvince
The state or province abbreviation.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
The reason for failure, if there is one. The only valid value is:
• DisabledCoder
• UnrecognizedPostalCode
Status.Description
The description of the failure. The valid values are:
Postal code not found
This value will appear if
Status.Code=UnrecognizedPostalCode.
PerformUSProcessing disabled This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
PerformCanadianProcessing
disabled
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
128
Stages Reference
Get City State Province Loqate
Get City State Province Loqate returns a city and state/province for a given input postal code.
This stage is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
The following table shows the input fields.
Table 49: Get City State Province Loqate Input
Field Name
Description
Country
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
• 2-digit ISO country code
• 3-digit UPU Country code
• English country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
PostalCode
The postal code for the address.
Options
Table 50: Get City State Province Loqate Options
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
Database
Specifies the database to be used for address processing. Only databases that
have been defined in the Database Resources panel in the Management Console
are available.
Maximum records to return
The maximum number of addresses that Get City State Province Loqate should
return. The default is 10.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
129
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
Script/Alphabet
Specifies the alphabet or script in which the output should be returned. This option
is bi-directional and generally takes place from Native to Latin and Latin to Native.
Data license error handling
Input Script
Do not perform transliteration and provide output in the
same script as the input (default).
Native
Output in the native script for the selected country
wherever possible.
Latin (English)
Use English values.
Specifies how you want Spectrum Technology Platform to respond when a data
license error occurs.
Fail the job
Fail the entire job if a data license error occurs.
Fail the record
Fail the record(s) for which the data license error occurs
and continue processing.
Output
Get City State Province Loqate returns the matching city and state/province for the input postal code
as well as a code to indicate the success or failure of the match attempt. If more than one city/state
or city/province matches the input postal code, multiple output records are returned.
Table 51: Get City State Province Loqate Output
Field Name
Description
City
The matched city name.
Country
The country in the format determined by what you selected in Country format:
• ISO Code
• UPU Code
• English
PostalCode
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
The input postal code.
Addressing Guide
130
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
ProcessedBy
Indicates which address coder processed the address.
LOQATE
The Loqate coder processed the address.
StateProvince
The state or province abbreviation.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
The reason for failure, if there is one. The only valid value is:
• UnrecognizedPostalCode
Status.Description
The description of the failure. The only valid value is:
Postal code not found
This value will appear if
Status.Code=UnrecognizedPostalCode.
Get Postal Codes
Get Postal Codes allows you to look up the postal codes for a particular city. The service takes a
city, state, and country as input and returns the postal codes for that city. The input must be exactly
correct in order to return postal codes.
Note: Get Postal Codes only works with U.S. addresses.
Get Postal Codes is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
Get Postal Codes takes a city, state/province, and country as input.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
131
Stages Reference
Table 52: Get Postal Codes Input
Field Name
Description
City
The city whose postal codes you want to look up.
You may put the city and state in the City field. If you do this, you must leave the
StateProvince field blank.
The total length of the City and StateProvince fields cannot exceed 100 characters.
StateProvince
The state or province of the city whose postal codes you want to look up.
You may also put the state in the City field instead of the StateProvince field.
The total length of the City and StateProvince fields cannot exceed 100 characters.
Country
The country code or name of the city whose postal codes you want to look up. The
only valid value is US.
Options
Table 53: Get Postal Codes Options
Option
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for postal code look-ups. Only databases that
have been defined in the US Database Resources panel in the Management Console
are available.
Include non-mailing city
Specifies whether or not to include postal codes for the city's non-mailing city names.
A non-mailing city name is an alternate name for the primary city name. For example,
Hollywood is a non-mailing city name for Los Angeles.
Include city type
Specifies whether or not to return the city type in the output. If enabled, the city type
is returned in the City.Type field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
132
Stages Reference
Output
Get Postal Codes returns the postal codes for a specified city. Each postal code is returned in a
separate record along with the data listed in the following table.
Table 54: Get Postal Codes Output
Field Name
Description
City.Type
The USPS® city type (U.S. addresses only). The city type is determined by looking
at the ZIP Code and the city name. For example, the city Lanham MD has the postal
codes 20703, 20706, and 20784. Lanham is the primary city in 20703 and 20706
but is a vanity city in 20784.
This field column is only populated if Include city type is checked. The possible
values are:
V
Vanity (non-mailing) city name.
P
Primary. The city name is the primary mailing city name.
S
Secondary. The city name is an alternate city name but is acceptable.
A city can have multiple secondary city names.
PostalCode
A postal code in the specified city.
ProcessedBy
Because this service only works for U.S. addresses, ProcessedBy will always contain
one value: USA.
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
Reason for failure, if there is one. One of the following:
• CountryNotSupported
• UnableToLookup
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
133
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Status.Description
Description of failure.
•
•
•
•
Input country is not supported
Input city was blank
Input city & state / province was blank, or no match found
City-state mismatch (different spelling found, or city-state was a vanity name and
vanity matching was not allowed, or city-state did not match ZIP Code)
Get Postal Codes Loqate
Get Postal Codes Loqate allows you to look up the postal codes for a particular city. The service
takes a city, state, and country as input and returns the postal codes for that city. The input must
be exactly correct in order to return postal codes.
Get Postal Codes Loqate is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
Get Postal Codes Loqate takes a city, state/province, and country as input.
Table 55: Get Postal Codes Loqate Input
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
City
The city whose postal codes you want to look up.
You may put the city and state in the City field. If you do this, you must leave the
StateProvince field blank.
Country
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
• 2-digit ISO country code
• 3-digit UPU Country code
• English country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
134
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
StateProvince
The state or province of the city whose postal codes you want to look up.
You may also put the state in the City field instead of the StateProvince field.
Options
Table 56: Get Postal Codes Loqate Options
Option
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for postal code look-ups. Only databases that
have been defined in the Management Console are available.
Data license error handling
Specifies how you want Spectrum Technology Platform to respond when a data
license error occurs.
Fail the job
Fail the entire job if a data license error occurs.
Fail the record
Fail the record(s) for which the data license error occurs
and continue processing.
Output
Get Postal Codes Loqate returns the postal codes for a specified city. Each postal code is returned
in a separate record along with the data listed in the following table.
Table 57: Get Postal Codes Loqate Output
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
PostalCode
A postal code in the specified city.
ProcessedBy
Indicates which address coder processed the address.
LOQATE
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
The Loqate coder processed the address.
135
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description / Valid Values
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
Reason for failure, if there is one. One of the following:
• InvalidCountry
• UnableToLookup
Status.Description
Description of failure.
• Input country is not supported
• Input city was blank
• Input city & state / province was blank, or no match found
Validate Address
Validate Address standardizes and validates addresses using postal authority address data. Validate
Address can correct information and format the address using the format preferred by the applicable
postal authority. It also adds missing postal information, such as postal codes, city names,
state/province names, and more.
Validate Address also returns result indicators about validation attempts, such as whether or not
Validate Address validated the address, the level of confidence in the returned address, the reason
for failure if the address could not be validated, and more.
During address matching and standardization, Validate Address separates address lines into
components and compares them to the contents of the Universal Addressing Module databases. If
a match is found, the input address is standardized to the database information. If no database
match is found, Validate Address optionally formats the input addresses. The formatting process
attempts to structure the address lines according to the conventions of the appropriate postal
authority.
Validate Address is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
136
Stages Reference
Input
Validate Address takes an address as input. All addresses use this format regardless of the address's
country. See Address Line Processing for U.S. Addresses on page 139 for important information
about how address line data is processed for U.S. addresses.
Table 58: Input Format
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String [50] The first address line.
AddressLine2
String [50] The second address line.
AddressLine3
String [50] The third address line.
Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
AddressLine4
String [50] The fourth address line.
Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
AddressLine5
String [50] The fifth address line.
Applies only to U.K. addresses. May contain street name, unit number,
building number, and so on.
City
String [50] The city name.
For U.S. addresses only, you may put the city, state, and ZIP Code™ in
the City field. If you do this, you must leave the StateProvince and
PostalCode fields blank.
StateProvince
String [50] The state or province.
For U.S. addresses only, you may put the state in the City field instead
of the StateProvince field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
137
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
PostalCode
String [10] The postal code for the address in one of the following formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
For U.S. addresses only, you may put the ZIP Code™ in the City field.
For U.S. addresses only, if the city/state/ZIP Code™ is in the PostalCode
field, Validate Address may parse the data and successfully process
the address. For best results, put this data in the appropriate fields (City,
StateProvince, and PostalCode).
Country
String [50] The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2 country code
Three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 country code
English country name
French country name
German country name
Spanish country name
For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName
String [50] The company or firm name.
USUrbanName
String [50] The U.S. address urbanization name. This is used primarily for Puerto
Rico addresses.
CustomerID
String [9]
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
If this mailpiece uses a generic barcode, specify your USPS®-assigned
customer ID in this field. The Validate Address generic barcode is used
for mailpieces that use the OneCode ACS® service.
Addressing Guide
138
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
CanLanguage
String
For Canadian addresses only, indicates whether the address is in English
or French, if the option the Determine language using field on the
Canadian Address Options tab is set to CanLanguage input
field.
If this field is blank, the address is formatted in English. If the field
contains any non-blank value, the address is formatted in French. Note
that addresses in Quebec are always formatted in French regardless of
the value in this field.
Address Line Processing for U.S. Addresses
The input fields AddressLine1 through AddressLine4 are handled differently for U.S. addresses
depending on whether the firm name extraction or urbanization code extraction options are enabled.
If either of these options is enabled, Validate Address will look at the data in all four fields to validate
the address and extract the requested data (firm name and/or urbanization code). If neither of these
options is enabled, Validate Address uses only the first two non-blank address line fields in its
validation attempt. The data in the other address line fields is returned in the output field
AdditionalInputData. For example,
AddressLine1: A1 Calle A
AddressLine2:
AddressLine3: URB Alamar
AddressLine4: Pitney Bowes
In this address, if either firm name extraction or urbanization code extraction were enabled, Validate
Address would examine all four address lines. If neither firm name extraction nor urbanization code
extraction were enabled, Validate Address would examine AddressLine1 and AddressLine3 (the
first two non-blank address lines) and attempt to validate the address using that data; the data in
AddressLine4 would be returned in the output field AdditionalInputData.
Options
Output Data Options
The following table lists the options that control the type of information returned by Validate Address.
Some of these options can be overridden for Canadian addresses. For more information, see
Canadian Address Options on page 162.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
139
Stages Reference
Table 59: Output Data Options
Option
Description
Include a standard address
Returns 1 to 4 lines of address data plus city, state, postal code, firm
name, and urbanization name information. Each address line represents
an actual line of the address as it would appear on an envelope. For
more information, see Output on page 173.
If Validate Address could validate the address, the address lines contain
the standardized address. When addresses are standardized,
punctuation is removed, directionals are abbreviated, street suffixes are
abbreviated, and address elements are corrected.
If Validate Address could not validate the address, the address lines
contain the address as it appeared in the input ("pass through" data).
Non-validated addresses are always included as pass through data in
the address line fields even if you uncheck this option.
Include matched address elements
Each part of the address, such as house number, street name, street
suffix, directionals, and so on is returned in a separate field. For more
information, see Parsed Address Elements Output on page 175. Note
that if you select this option and also select Return normalized data
when no match is found, the address elements will contain the input
address for addresses that could not be validated.
Include postal information
Output addresses contain various additional data for each validated
address. For more information, see Postal Data Output on page 180.
Include standardized input address elements
This option returns the input address in parsed form regardless of
whether or not Validate Address is able to validate the address. Each
part of the input address, such as house number, street name, street
suffix, directionals, and so on is returned in a separate field.
Selecting this option differs from selecting the combination of Include
matched address elements/Return normalized data when no match
is found in that Return standardized input address elements returns
all input address in parsed form, not just input that could not be validated.
For more information, see Parsed Input on page 178.
Include result codes for individual fields
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies whether to include field-level result indicators. Field-level result
indicators describe how each address element was handled. Field-level
result indicators are returned in the qualifier "Result". For example, the
field-level result indicator for HouseNumber is contained in
HouseNumber.Result. For a complete listing of result indicator output
fields, see Field-Level Result Indicators on page 187.
Addressing Guide
140
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Return normalized data when no match is found Specifies whether to return a formatted address when an address cannot
be validated. The address is formatted using the preferred address
format for the address's country. If this option is not selected, the output
address fields are blank when the address cannot be validated.
Note: This option applies only to U.S. and Canadian
addresses. Formatted data will not be returned for any other
address.
Formatted addresses are returned using the format specified by the
Include a standard address, Include address line elements, and
Include postal information check boxes. Note that if you select Include
address line elements, the parsed address elements will contain the
parsed, validated address for addresses that could be validated. If the
address could not be validated the parsed address elements will contain
the input address in parsed form. If you always want the output to contain
the input address in parsed form, regardless of whether or not Validate
Address could validate the address, select Include standardized input
address elements.
If you check this option, you must select Include a standard address
and/or Include address line elements.
Return street name alias
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
For U.S. addresses only, specifies whether or not to use a street's alias
in the output. A street alias is an alternate name for a street and typically
applies only to a specific range of addresses on the street. If you do not
allow street aliases in the output then the street's "base" name will appear
in the output regardless of whether or not there is an alias for the street.
The base name is the name that applies to the entire street.
Addressing Guide
141
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Return street name alias
For U.S. addresses only, specifies how to handle street name aliases
used in the input. A street alias is an alternate name for a street and
typically applies only to a specific range of addresses on the street.
If you enable this option, street name aliases used in the input will appear
in the output. If you do not enable this option, street name aliases in the
input will be converted to the base street name in the output, with the
following exceptions:
• If a preferred alias is used in input the preferred alias will always be
used in output.
• Changed aliases used in input are always converted to the base street
name in output.
This is one of three options that control how Validate Address handles
street name aliases. The other two are Preferred street name alias
processing and Abbreviated street name alias processing.
Note: If Abbreviated street name alias processing is
enabled, the abbreviated alias will always appear in the output
even if you have Return street name alias disabled.
Return address data blocks
Specifies whether to return a formatted version of the address as it would
be printed on a physical mailpiece. Each line of the address is returned
in a separate address block field. There can be up to nine address block
output fields: AddressBlock1 through AddressBlock9.
For example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
City: Lanham
StateProvince: MD
PostalCode: 20706
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
AddressBlock2: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
AddressBlock3: UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Validate Address formats the address into address blocks using postal
authority standards. The country name is returned using the Universal
Postal Union country name. Note that the option Country format does
not affect the country name in the address block, it only affects the name
returned in the Country output field.
For addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, if Validate Address is
unable to validate the address, no address blocks are returned. For
addresses in the U.S. and Canada, address blocks are returned even
if validation fails.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
142
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Format data using AMAS conventions
Specifies whether to return a formatted version of the address as it would
be printed on a physical mailpiece. Each line of the address is returned
in a separate address block field. There can be up to nine address block
output fields: AddressBlock1 through AddressBlock9.
For example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
City: Lanham
StateProvince: MD
PostalCode: 20706
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
AddressBlock2: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
AddressBlock3: UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Validate Address formats the address into address blocks using postal
authority standards. The country name is returned using the Universal
Postal Union country name. Note that the option Country format does
not affect the country name in the address block, it only affects the name
returned in the Country output field.
For addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, if Validate Address is
unable to validate the address, no address blocks are returned. For
addresses in the U.S. and Canada, address blocks are returned even
if validation fails.
Obtaining Congressional Districts
Validate Address can determine the U.S. congressional district for an address.
To obtain congressional districts, select the Include postal information check box on the Output
Data Options tab. This will return a variety of data about the address, including the congressional
district. For information on the specific data that this option will return, see Postal Data Output on
page 180.
Table 60: Congressional District Output
Field Name
Description
USCongressionalDistrict
Congressional district number. If the address is a non-state address (for example
Puerto Rico or Washington D.C.) this field is blank.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
143
Stages Reference
Obtaining County Names
Validate Address can determine the county where a particular address is located and return the
county name.
Note: County names are available for U.S. addresses only.
To obtain county names, select the Include postal information check box on the Output Data
Option tab. This will return a variety of data about the address, including county names. For
information on the specific data that this option will return, see Postal Data Output on page 180.
Table 61: County Name Output
Field Name
Description
USCountyName
County name
Obtaining FIPS County Numbers
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) county numbers are numbers that identify each
county in a state. Note that these numbers are only unique at the state level, not the national level.
For more information, see http://www.census.gov.
Note: FIPS county numbers are available for U.S. addresses only.
To obtain FIPS county numbers, select the Include postal information check box on the Output
Data Options tab. This will return a variety of data about the address, including FIPS county numbers.
For information on the specific data that this option will return, see Postal Data Output on page
180.
Table 62: FIPS County Number Output
Field Name
Description
USFIPSCountyNumber
FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standards) county number
Obtaining Carrier Route Codes
Carrier route codes are unique identifiers assigned to each mail carrier who delivers mail, allowing
unique identification of each U.S. delivery route. Validate Address can return the code that represents
an addressee's carrier route.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
144
Stages Reference
Note: Carrier route codes are available for U.S. addresses only.
To obtain carrier route codes, select the Include postal information check box on the Output Data
Options tab. This will return a variety of data about the address, including carrier route codes. For
information on the specific data that this option will return, see Postal Data Output on page 180.
Table 63: Carrier Route Code Output
Field Name
Description
USCarrierRouteCode
Carrier route code
Creating Delivery Point Barcodes
A Delivery Point Barcode (DPBC) is a POSTNET™ barcode representation of the address. It consists
of 62 bars with beginning and ending frame bars and five bars each for the ZIP + 4® Code, a value
calculated based on the street address number, and a correction digit. The DPBC allows automated
sortation of letter mail to the carrier level in walk sequence. Validate Address generates the data
you need to assemble a DPBC.
Note: Delivery Point Barcodes are available for U.S. addresses only. For more information
on Delivery Point Barcodes, see http://www.usps.com.
To generate the data needed to assemble a DPBC, select the Include postal information check
box on the Output Data Options tab. This will return a variety of data about the address, including
data needed to construct DPBCs. For information on the specific data that this option will return,
see Postal Data Output on page 180.
Table 64: Delivery Point Barcode Output
Field Name
Description
PostalBarCode
The delivery point portion of the delivery point barcode.
USBCCheckDigit
Check-digit portion of the 11-digit delivery point barcode.
To assemble a DPBC you concatenate the values found in the Validate Address output fields as
follows:
PostalCode.Base + PostalCode.Addon + PostalBarcode + USBCCheckDigit
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
145
Stages Reference
For example, if you have the following:
•
•
•
•
PostalCode.Base = 49423
PostalCode.Addon = 4506
PostalBarcode = 29
USBCCheckDigit = 2
The assembled barcode would be:
494234506292
Default Options
The following table lists the options that control the format and processing of addresses. These are
called "default options" because by default the apply to all addresses. Some of these options can
be overridden for Canadian addresses. For more information, see Canadian Address Options on
page 162.
Table 65: Default Options
Option
Description
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output address. One of the following:
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For
example:
123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example:
123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Insert postal code separation character
Specifies whether to use separators (spaces or hyphens) in ZIP™ Codes
or Canadian postal codes.
For example, a ZIP + 4® Code with the separator would be 20706-1844
and without the separator it would be 207061844. A Canadian postal
code with the separator would be P5E"1S7 and without the separator
it would be P5E1S7.
Note: Spaces are used in Canadian postal codes and hyphens
in U.S. ZIP + 4® Codes.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
146
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Output multinational characters
Specifies whether or not to return multinational characters, including
diacritical marks such as umlauts or accents. (Not supported for U.S.
addresses).
Return multiple addresses
Indicates whether or not to return multiple address for those input
addresses that have more than one possible match.
For more information, see Returning Multiple Matches on page 150.
Secondary address placement
Specifies where to place secondary address information for U.S.
addresses. Secondary address information refers to apartment numbers,
suite numbers, and similar designators. For example, in this address
the secondary address information is "Apt 10E" and the primary address
information is "424 Washington Blvd".
Apt 10E
424 Washington Blvd
Springfield MI 49423
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Same line as
address
Place both primary and secondary address
information in AddressLine1 (default).
Separate
address line
Place the primary address information in
AddressLine1 and the secondary address
information in AddressLine2.
Dual address
separation
Place both primary and secondary address
information in AddressLine1 and place dropped
information from dual addresses in AddressLine2.
A dual address is an address that contains both
street information and PO Box/Rural
Route/Highway Contract information. For more
information, see About Dual Address Logic on
page 149.
Addressing Guide
147
Stages Reference
Option
Description
City format
Specifies how to format city names that have short city name or
non-mailing city name alternatives. Applies to U.S. and Canadian
addresses.
®
Short
Returns the USPS -approved abbreviation for the city, if
®
there is one. The USPS provides abbreviations for city
names that are 14 characters long or longer. City
abbreviations are 13 characters or less and can be used
when there is limited space on the mailing label. If there
is no short city name for the city, then the full city name
is returned.
Long
Returns the long city name (default).
Standard
Returns the abbreviated city name only if an abbreviated
city name is used in the input address. If the input address
does not use a short city name, either the long or short
®
city name could be returned, depending on USPS
regulations for the particular city. Select this option if you
™
are performing a CASS test.
Non-Mailing Output the non-mailing city name (the vanity name) if the
(Vanity)
input city name is a non-mailing city name. For example,
"Hollywood" is a non-mailing city name for "Los Angeles".
If you do not select this option and the input city name is
a non-mailing city name the long version of the mailing
city is returned.
Country format
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies the format to use for the country name returned in the Country
output field. For example, if you select English, the country name
"Deutschland" would be returned as "Germany".
English Names
Use English country names (default).
Spanish Names
Use Spanish country names.
French Names
Use French country names.
German Names
Use German country names.
ISO Codes
Use two-letter ISO abbreviation for the
countries instead of country names.
UPU Codes
Use Universal Postal Union abbreviation for
the countries instead of country names.
Addressing Guide
148
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Default country
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where
most of your addresses reside. For example, if most of the addresses
you process are in Canada, specify Canada. Validate Address uses the
country you specify to attempt validation when it cannot determine the
country from the StateProvince, PostalCode, and Country address fields.
Dual address logic
Indicates how to return a match if multiple non-blank address lines are
present or multiple address types are on the same address line. (U.S.
addresses only.)
Normal Match
®
™
(Default) USPS CASS regulations determine
the address returned based on the following order
of priority:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PO Box
Firm
Highrise
Street
Rural Route
General Delivery
Street Match
Return a street match, regardless of the address
line.
PO Box Match
Return a PO Box match, regardless of the address
line.
For more information, see About Dual Address Logic on page 149.
About Dual Address Logic
For U.S. addresses only, the Dual address logic option controls whether Validate Address should
return a street match or a PO Box/Rural Route/Highway Contract match when the address contains
both street and PO Box/Rural Route/Highway Contract information in the same address line.
Note: The Dual address logic option has no effect if the street information is in a different
address line input field than the PO Box/Rural Route/Highway Contract information.
For example, given the following input address:
AddressLine1: 401 N Main St Apt 1 POB 1
City: Kemp
StateProvince: TX
PostalCode: 75143
Validate Address would return one of the following:
• If Dual address logic is set to either Normal Match or PO Box Match:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
149
Stages Reference
AddressLine1: PO Box 1
City: Kemp
StateProvince: TX
PostalCode: 75143-0001
• If Dual address logic is set to Street Match:
AddressLine1: 401 N Main St Apt 1
City: Kemp
StateProvince: TX
PostalCode: 75143-4806
The address data that is not used to standardize the address can be returned in one of two places:
• AddressLine2—The address information not used to standardize the address is returned in the
AddressLine2 field if you select Dual address separation in the Secondary address
placement field. For more information, see Default Options on page 146. For example, if you
choose to return a street match for dual addresses,
AddressLine1: 401 N Main St Apt 1
AddressLine2: PO Box 1
City: Kemp
StateProvince: TX
PostalCode: 75143-0001
• AdditionalInputData—If you do not select Dual address separation in the Secondary
address placement field then the address information not used to standardize the address is
returned in the AdditionalInputData field. For more information on this option, see Default Options
on page 146. For example, if you choose to return a street match for dual addresses,
AddressLine1: 401 N Main St Apt 1
City: Kemp
StateProvince: TX
PostalCode: 75143-0001
AdditionalInputData: PO Box 1
Address information that is dropped can be retrieved by settingSecondary address placement to
Dual address separation. For more information, see Default Options on page 146 .
Returning Multiple Matches
If Validate Address finds multiple address in the postal database that are possible matches for the
input address, you can have Validate Address return the possible matches. For example, the following
address matches multiple addresses in the U.S. postal database:
PO BOX 1
New York, NY
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
150
Stages Reference
Options
To return multiple matches, use the options described in the following table.
Table 66: Multiple Match Option
Option Name
Description
Return multiple addresses
Indicates whether or not to return multiple address for those input addresses that
have more than one possible match.
Maximum results
Next to the Return multiple addresses check box, enter a number between 1 and
10 that indicates the maximum number of addresses to return.
The default value is 1.
Note: The difference between unchecking Return multiple addresses
and checking Return multiple addresses and specifying a maximum
number of results of 1 is that a multiple match will return a failure if Return
multiple addresses is unchecked, whereas a multiple match will return
one record if Return multiple addresses is checked and the maximum
number of results is 1.
Include result codes for individual
fields
To identify which output addresses are candidate addresses, you must check Include
result codes for individual fields on the Output Data tab. When you do this,
records that are candidate addresses will have one or more "M" values in the
field-level result indicators.
Output
When you choose to return multiple matches, the addresses are returned in the address format you
specify. For information on specifying address format, see Output Data Options on page 139. To
identify which records are the candidate addresses, look for multiple "M" values in the field-level
result indicators. For more information, see Field-Level Result Indicators on page 187.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
151
Stages Reference
U.S. Address Options
Option Name
Description
Enable U.S. address processing
Specifies whether to process U.S. addresses. If you enable U.S. address processing
Validate Address will attempt to validate U.S. addresses. If you disable U.S. address
processing, U.S. addresses will fail, meaning they are returned with an "F" in the
Status output field. The output field Status.Code will say "DisabledCoder." If you are
not licensed for U.S. address processing you must disable U.S. address processing
in order for your jobs to complete successfully, regardless of whether or not they
contain U.S. addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for U.S. address processing to
successfully process U.S. addresses. If you enable U.S. address processing
but are not licensed for this feature, or your license has expired, your entire
job will fail.
Database
Specifies which database to use for validating U.S. addresses. Only databases that
have been defined in the US Database Resources panel in the Management Console
are available.
Line of travel
Enhanced Line of Travel (eLOT) processing assigns a Line of Travel sequence code
to your addresses. Note that addresses are not sorted into eLOT sequence but they
are assigned a Line of Travel sequence code that allows you to sort addresses into
eLOT sequence.
To perform eLOT processing you must have the eLOT database installed.
For a listing of the output fields returned by this option, see Enhanced Line of Travel
Output on page 201.
Residential Delivery Indicator
processing
Residential Delivery Indicator (RDI™) processing checks if an address is a residential
address (not a business address). To perform RDI™ processing, you must have the
RDI™ database installed.
If you enable both DPV® and RDI™ processing, RDI™ information is only returned if
the address is a valid delivery point. If DPV® does not validate the address no RDI™
data is returned.
Enhanced street matching
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Enhanced Street Matching (ESM) applies additional matching logic to correct
misspelled or complex street names and obtain a match. ESM enables more
addresses to be validated but it reduces performance. You cannot perform ESM
when ASM is enabled.
Addressing Guide
152
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
All street matching
All Street Matching (ASM) applies ESM processing as well as additional matching
logic to correct errors in street names and obtain a match. It is effective at matching
streets when the first letter of the street is incorrect. ASM provides the best address
validation but reduces performance.
Delivery Point Validation & CMRA Delivery Point Validation (DPV®) validates that a specific address exists, as opposed
to validating that a specific address is within a range of valid addresses. CMRA
processing checks if an address is for a mailbox rented from a private company,
referred to as a Commercial Mail Receiving Agent (CMRA).
To perform DPV and CMRA processing, you must have the DPV database installed.
The DPV database contains both DPV and CMRA data.
For a listing of the output fields returned by this option, see DPV and CMRA Output
on page 204.
LACS/Link conversion
The USPS® Locatable Address Conversion System (LACS) allows you to correct
addresses that have changed as a result of a rural route address converting to
street-style address, a PO Box renumbering, or a street-style address changing.
Link
When enabled, LACS
processing is attempted for addresses that could not be
Link
validated, or addresses were validated and flagged for LACS
conversion.
Link
To perform LACS
Link
processing, you must have the LACS
database installed.
For a listing of the output fields returned by this option, see LACSLink Output on
page 202
Early Warning System
The Early Warning System (EWS) uses the USPS® EWS File to validate addresses
that are not in the ZIP + 4® database.
To perform EWS processing, you must have the EWS database installed.
If an input address matches an address in the EWS file, the following record-level
result indicators are returned:
• Status="F"
• Status.Code="EWSFailure"
• Status.Description="Address found in EWS table"
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
153
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Firm name extraction
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
154
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Specifies whether to extract the firm name from AddressLine1 through AddressLine4
and place it in the FirmName output field. This option works in cases where the input
record's FirmName field is blank and there is more than one address line.
To identify firm names in address lines, the address lines are scanned for keywords
and patterns that identify which fields are address lines and which are FirmName
lines. Since this is done based on patterns, fields may be misidentified. The following
tips can help ensure optimal firm extraction:
• If possible, place the primary address elements in AddressLine1, the secondary
elements in AddressLine2, Urbanization in AddressLine3, and firm in AddressLine4.
If the address has no urbanization code, then place the firm name in AddressLine3
and leave AddressLine4 blank. For example,
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
AddressLine3: Pitney Bowes
AddressLine4: <blank>
• When you define just two address lines, AddressLine2 is assigned to the secondary
address most of the time. If you want to increase the chance that AddressLine2
will be treated as a firm name, put the firm name in AddressLine3 and leave
AddressLine2 blank.
• Numbers in a firm name (such as the "1" in "1 Stop Software") will increase the
likelihood that the field will be treated as an address line.
Here are some examples of firm name extraction:
• In this example, AddressLine2 would get extracted into the FirmName output field
FirmName: <blank>
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place Suite 600
AddressLine2: International Goose Feathers inc.
• In this example, AddressLine3 would get extracted into the FirmName output field.
FirmName: <blank>
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
AddressLine3: Pitney Bowes
• In this example, AddressLine3 would be placed in the AdditionalInputData output
field. The firm name would not be extracted because the FirmName input field is
not blank.
FirmName: International Goose Feathers Inc.
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
AddressLine3: Pitney Bowes
• In this example, no firm name would be extracted because there is only one
non-blank address line, which is always treated as the primary address element.
FirmName: <blank>
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place Suite 600
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
155
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
• In this example, AddressLine2 would be treated as a secondary address element
because the numeral "1" causes that field to be treated as a secondary address
element.
FirmName: <blank>
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place Suite 600
AddressLine2: 1 Stop Software
U.S. urbanization name extraction Specifies whether to extract the urbanization name from AddressLine1 through
AddressLine4 and place it in the USUrbanName output field. This option works in
cases where the input record's USUrbanName field is blank and there is more than
one address line.
To identify urbanization names, the address lines are scanned for keywords and
patterns that identify which fields are address lines and which are urbanization name
lines. Since this is done based on patterns, it is possible for fields to be incorrectly
identified. To help ensure optimal urbanization extraction, place the primary address
elements in AddressLine1, the secondary elements in AddressLine2, Urbanization
in AddressLine3, and firm in AddressLine4, if possible. For example,
AddressLine1: A1 Calle A
AddressLine2:
AddressLine3: URB Alamar
AddressLine4: Pitney Bowes
Suite/Link support
Link™
Specifies whether to perform Suite
processing.
Link
Suite
corrects secondary address information for U.S. business addresses whose
Link
secondary address information could not be validated. If Suite
processing is
enabled, the firm name is matched to a database of known firm names and their
secondary address information.
For example,
Firm Name: Pitney Bowes
Address Line 1: 4200 Parliament Place
Address Line 2: STE 1
Postal Code: 20706
Link
In this case, Suite
number:
processing would change the suite number to the correct suite
Firm Name: Pitney Bowes
Address Line 1: 4200 Parliament Place
Address Line 2: STE 600
Postal Code: 20706-1844
Link™
To perform Suite
Link™
processing, you must have the Suite
database installed.
For a listing of fields returned by this option, see SuiteLink Output on page 206.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
156
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Preferred alias street name
processing
Specifies whether to use a street's preferred alias in the output.
Street name aliases in the United States are alternative names given to sections of
a street. There are four types of street name aliases:
• Preferred—A preferred alias is the street name preferred locally. It typically applies
only to a specific range of addresses on the street.
• Abbreviated—An abbreviated alias is a variation of the street name that can be
used in cases where the length of AddressLine1 is longer than 31 characters. For
example, the street name 1234 BERKSHIRE VALLEY RD APT 312A could be
abbreviated to 1234 BERKSHIRE VLLY RD APT 312A.
• Changed—There has been an official street name change and the alias reflects
the new name. For example if SHINGLE BROOK RD is changed to CANNING
DR, then CANNING DR would be a changed alias type.
• Other—The street alias is made up of other names for the street or common
abbreviations of the street.
The non-alias version of the street name is called the base street name.
If the preferred alias is used in the input then the preferred alias will be the street
name in the output regardless of whether you enable this option.
This is one of three options that control how Validate Address handles street name
aliases. The other two are Return street name alias and Abbreviated street name
alias processing.
In most cases, if you select both Preferred street name alias processing and
Abbreviated street name alias processing, and Validate Address finds both a
preferred and an abbreviated alias in the postal database, the abbreviated alias will
be used in the output. The exception to this rule is if the input street name is a
preferred alias. In this case, the preferred alias will be used in the output.
Note: If the input address contains a street name alias of type "changed"
the output address will always contain the base street name regardless of
the options you specify.
Abbreviated alias street name
processing
Specifies whether to use a street's abbreviated alias in the output if the output
address line is longer than 31 characters.
This is one of three options that control how Validate Address handles street name
aliases. The other two are Return street name alias and Preferred street name
alias processing.
Note: If a preferred alias is specified in the input, the output street name
will always be the preferred alias, even if you enable abbreviated street
name alias processing.
Note: If the input address contains a street name alias of type "changed"
the output address will always contain the base street name regardless of
the options you specify.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
157
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Determine if delivery point is active Determines the "no stat" status of an address. An address is considered "no stat"
if it exists but cannot receive mail, and therefore is not counted as a delivery statistic
on a carrier's route (hence the term "no stat"). Examples include buildings under
construction or those that the letter carrier has identified as not likely to receive mail.
Note: You must enable DPV processing to use this option.
The result is returned in the DPVNoStat field. For more information see LACSLink
Output on page 202
Determine if address is vacant
Determines if the location has been unoccupied for at least 90 days.
Note: You must enable DPV processing to use this option.
The result is returned in the DPVVacant field. For more information see LACSLink
Output on page 202
Return VeriMove detail data
Returns VeriMove detail data in output.
Suppress zip+4 carrier route R777 Specifies whether to supress addresses with Carrier Route R777. These addresses
are phantom routes and are not eligible for street delivery. Since these addresses
are assigned a ZIP + 4® code by the USPS®, Validate Address marks these
addresses as deliverable. Select this option if you do not want addresses with Carrier
Route R777 marked as deliverable. This will cause the following actions:
• No ZIP + 4 code is assigned
• Address is not counted on the USPS Form 3553 (CASS Summary Report)
• DPV Footnote of R7 is returned
Street matching
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies the algorithm to use when determining if an input address matches an
address in the postal database. One of the following:
Exact
The input street name must match the database exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium" (default).
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
Addressing Guide
158
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Firm matching
Specifies the algorithm to use when determining if an input address matches an
address in the postal database. One of the following:
Directional matching
DPV Success Condition
Exact
The input firm name must match the database exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium" (default).
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
Specifies the algorithm to use when determining if an input address matches an
address in the postal database. One of the following:
Exact
The input directionals, such as the "N" in 123 N Main St.,
must match the database exactly.
Tight
The matching algorithm is "tight."
Medium
The matching algorithm is "medium". Default.
Loose
The matching algorithm is "loose."
Select the match condition where a DPV result does NOT cause a record to fail.
Note: You must enable DPV processing to use this option.
Fail on CMRA match
Treat Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA) matches as failures?
Note: You must enable DPV processing to use this option.
Place PMB elements in
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies where Private Mailbox (PMB) information is placed.
No AddressLine
Do not include the PMB information in Standard Address
output (default).
AddressLine1
Place the PMB information in AddressLine1.If you choose
AddressLine1, you must set the Address Format field to
either Combined Unit or Separate Dual
Address.
AddressLine2
Place the PMB information in AddressLine2. You may not
select this option if Generate 3553 Form is checked.
Addressing Guide
159
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Preferred City
Specifies whether the preferred last line city name should be stored.
ZIP+4 Last
Line
Store the Preferred Last Line City Name from the USPS ZIP+4
File (Override City Name).
Note: If you select this option, Validate Address
generates a CASS-certified configuration and the USPS
3553 Report.
USPS
City/State
Store the USPS-preferred City Name from USPS City/State File.
Primary
Store the Primary City Name from the USPS City/State File.
Note: If you select this option, Validate Address does
not generate a CASS-certified configuration and does
not generate the USPS 3553 Report.
Note: If you select this option, Validate Address does
not generate a CASS-certified configuration and does
not generate the USPS 3553 Report.
CASS Certified Processing
Validate Address can operate in a CASS Certified™ mode when a specific combination of options
are enabled. CASS Certified™ processing enables you to qualify for USPS® postal discounts.
When you use CASS Certified™ processing, Validate Address generates USPS CASS Form 3553.
This form must be given to the USPS along with the mailing to qualify for certain discounts. The
form contains information about the software you used for CASS processing, information about your
name-and-address list, information about your output file, information about the mailer, and other
statistics about your mailing. For detailed information about USPS Form 3553, see www.usps.com
.
CASS Certified™ processing also generates the USPS CASS Detailed Report, which contains some
of the same information as the 3553 report but provides much greater detail about DPV, LACS, and
SuiteLink statistics. The USPS CASS Detailed Report is not required for postal discounts and does
not need to be submitted with your mailing.
Note: USPS CASS Form 3553 and the USPS CASS Detailed Report are available for batch
processing only.
To run Validate Address in CASS Certified™ mode, follow these steps:
1. Validate Address must be in CASS Certified™ mode. If (Not CASS Certified) appears at the
top of the window, click the Enable CASS button. The Enforce CASS rules check box will
appear.
2. Click Configure CASS 3553. The CASS Report Fields dialog box appears.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
160
Stages Reference
3. Type the List Processor company name, List Name or ID#, and the Number of Lists being
processed for this job.
4. Type the Mailer Name, Address, and City, State, ZIP.
5. Click OK.
The List information will appear in Section B and the Mailer information in Section D of the
generated USPS® CASS Form 3553.
6. In Enterprise Designer, drag the CASS3553 report from the Reports pallet to the canvas.
7. Double-click the CASS3553 icon on the canvas.
8. On the Stages tab, check the Validate Address checkbox. Note that if you have renamed the
Validate Address stage to something else, you should check the box with the name you have
given the address validation stage.
9. On the Parameters tab, select the format for the report. You can create the report in PDF,
HTML, or plain text format.
10. Click OK.
11. Repeat steps 6-10 for CASSDetail if you want to produce the CASS Detail Report.
Note: You do not need to draw a connector between the Validate Address stage and
the reports.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
161
Stages Reference
Canadian Address Options
Option Name
Description
Enable Canadian address processing
Specifies whether to process Canadian addresses. If you
enable Canadian address processing Validate Address will
attempt to validate Canadian addresses. If you disable
Canadian address processing, Canadian addresses will fail,
meaning they is returned with an "F" in the Status output
field. The output field Status.Code will say "DisabledCoder."
If you are not licensed for Canadian address processing
you must disable Canadian address processing in order for
your jobs to complete successfully, regardless of whether
or not they contain Canadian addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for Canadian
address processing to successfully process
Canadian addresses. If you enable Canadian
address processing but are not licensed for this
feature, or your license has expired, your entire job
will fail.
Database
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies which database you want to use for validating
Canadian addresses. To specify a database for Canadian
address validation, select a database in the Database
drop-down list. Only databases that have been defined in
the CAN Database Resources panel in the Management
Console are available.
Addressing Guide
162
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Determine language using
Specifies how to determine the language (English or French)
to use to format the address and directional. The following
example shows an address formatted in English and French:
English: 123 Main St W
French: 123 Rue Main O
The parameter controls the formatting of the address. It also
affects the spelling of the directional but not spelling of the
suffix.
Street suffix Use the street suffix returned by the
matching process to determine the
language. The street suffix returned by the
matching process, which is used internally
by Validate Address during processing,
may be different from that in the input
address. Ambiguous records are formatted
like the input. Default. All addresses in
Quebec are formatted using French.
CPC
database
Use the Canadian database to determine
the language. The Canadian database
contains data from the Canada Post
Corporation (CPC). All addresses in
Quebec are formatted using French.
CanLanguage Use the CanLanguage input field to
field
determine the language. If there is a
non-blank value in this field the address
are formatted using French.
Default English apt label
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
For English addresses, specifies the default apartment label
to use in the output if there is no apartment label in the input
address. This setting is ignored if you select Number in
front in the Secondary address format field.
Addressing Guide
Apt
Use "Apt" as the label. Default.
Apartment
Use "Apartment" as the label.
Suite
Use "Suite" as the label.
Unit
Use "Unit" as the label.
163
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Default French apt label
For French addresses, specifies the default apartment label
to use in the output if there is no apartment label in the input
address. This setting is ignored if you select Number in
front in the Secondary address format field.
Force Correction for LVR/Single-Single CPC data record
App
Use "App" as the label. Default.
Appartement
Use "Appartement" as the label.
Bureau
Use "Bureau" as the label.
Suite
Use "Suite" as the label.
Unite
Use "Unite" as the label.
Changes the civic and/or suite information to match the
Large Volume Receiver (LVR) or single-single record (used
when there is only one record for that postal code/street
name/street type).
N
Do not change the civic and/or suite information to
match the LVR or single-single record. The LVR
record will be marked as a valid but non-correctable
record (VN). The single-single record will be corrected,
if possible, or processed as a non-correctable record..
Y
Change the civic and/or suite information to match
the LVR or single-single record.
Note: If you check this box, the Statement
of Address Accuracy will not be printed
because this is not a SERP-recognized
setting.
Prefer house number on postal code conflict
In cases where the house number and postal code are both
valid but in conflict, you can force the postal code to be
corrected based on the house number by selecting Prefer
house number on postal code conflict. If you do not select
this option the house number is changed to match the postal
code.
Return city alias
Specifies whether or not to return the city alias when the
alias is in the input address. This option is disabled when
you select Use default option in the City format field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
164
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Abbreviate non-civic keywords
Specifies whether or not non-civic keywords are abbreviated
in the output. For example, Post Office Box vs. PO Box.
Enable SERP settings
Specifies whether or not to use SERP options.
Secondary address format
Specifies where to place secondary address information in
the output address. Secondary address information refers
to apartment numbers, suite numbers, and similar
designators.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
Use default
option
Place apartment information in the
location specified in theSecondary
address format field in the Default
Options tab. Default.
End of address
line
Place apartment information at the at
the end of the AddressLine1 field.
Front, number
only
Place the apartment number only (no
label) at the beginning of the
AddressLine1 field. For example,
400-123 Rue Main
Front, number
and label
Place the apartment number and label
at the beginning of the AddressLine1
field. For example, Apt 400 123 Rue
Main
Separate
address line
Place apartment information on a
separate line.
Same as input
Place apartment information in the
same location as the input address.
165
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
City format
Specifies whether to use the long, medium, or short version
of the city if the city has a long name. For example,
Long: BUFFALO HEAD PRAIRIE
Medium: BUFFALO-HEAD-PR
Short: BUFFALO-HD-PR
Place rural route into in
Use default
option
Use the default option specified on the
Default Options tab, City format field.
Default. If you select Non-mailing
(vanity) in the City format field, the
city is formatted as if you select Long for
this option (see below) and check the
Return city alias box.
Short
Output short city name.
Long
Output the long city name.
Medium
Output the medium city name.
Same as
input
Use the same city format as used in the
input address. Output is L, M, or S.
Specifies where to place rural route delivery information.
An example of an address with rural route delivery
information is:
36 GRANT RD RR 3
ANTIGONISH NS
In this address, "RR 3" is the rural route delivery information.
AddressLine1 Place rural route delivery information on
the same line as the address, after the
address information. Default. For example,
36 GRANT RD RR 3
AddressLine2 Place rural route delivery information on a
separate address line. For example,
36 GRANT RD
RR 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
166
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Place delivery office info in
Specifies where to place station information. An example
of an address with station information is:
PO BOX 8625 STN A
ST. JOHN'S NL
Same as input Place station information in the same
location as it is in the input address.
Default.
AddressLine1 Place station information on the same line
as the address, after the address
information. For example,
PO BOX 8625 STN A
AddressLine2 Place station information on a separate
address line. For example,
PO BOX 8625
STN A
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
167
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Dual address logic
Specifies whether Validate Address should return a street
match or a PO Box/non-civic match when the address
contains both civic and non-civic information. One of the
following:
Use default option
Use DualAddressLogic Global
Option. Default.
PO Box Match
Match to PO Box or other
non-street data.
Street Match
Match to street.
For example, given the following input address:
AddressLine1: 36 GRANT RD
AddressLine2: RR 4
City: ANTIGONISH
StateProvince: NS
Validate Address would return one of the following:
• If Dual address logic is set to Street
Validate Address returns the following:
Match,
AddressLine1: 36 GRANT RD
AddressLine2: RR 3
City: ANTIGONISH
StateProvince: NS
PostalCode: B2G 2L1
• If Dual address logic is set to PO Box
Validate Address returns the following:
Match,
AddressLine1: RR 4
City: ANTIGONISH
StateProvince: NS
PostalCode: B2G 2L2
The address data that is not used to standardize the address
is returned in the AdditionalInputData field. For more
information, see Output Data Options on page 139.
SERP Processing
Validate Address allows for Software and Evaluation Recognition Processing ( SERP ). SERP
processing enables you to qualify for Canada Post® postal discounts. Validate Address returns
PoCAD data, which improves accuracy for house number and apartment data.
Note: You can return PoCAD data in batch mode only. If you try to return PoCAD data in
real time, Validate Address will return with an error.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
168
Stages Reference
When you use SERP Certified™ processing, Validate Address generates a Canada Post SERP
Statement of Accuracy. This form must be given to Canada Post along with the mailing to qualify
for certain discounts. The form contains information about the software you used for SERP processing,
information about your name-and-address list, information about your output file, information about
the mailer, and other statistics about your mailing. For detailed information about Canada Post
Address Accuracy Statement, see
http://www.canadapost.ca/cpo/mc/business/productsservices/atoz/addressaccuracy.jsf.
To run Validate Address in SERP Certified™ mode, follow these steps:
1. Validate Address must be in SERP Certified™ mode. If (Not SERP Certified) appears at the
top of the window, click the Enable SERP settings button. The Configure SERP box will
appear.
2. Click Configure SERP. The SERP Report Fields dialog box appears.
3. Type your merchant CPC number.
4. Type the mailer Name, Address, and City, State, ZIP.
5. Click OK.
6. In Enterprise Designer, drag the SERPReport from the Reports pallet to the canvas.
Note: You do not need to draw a connector between the Validate Address stage and
the CASS3553 report.
7. Double-click the SERPReport icon on the canvas.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
169
Stages Reference
8. On the Stages tab, ensure that the Validate Address checkbox is checked. Note that if you
have renamed the Validate Address stage to something else, you should check the box with
the name you have given the address validation stage.
9. On the Parameters tab, select the format for the report. You can create the report in PDF,
HTML, or plain text format. PDF format is the default.
10. Click OK.
Obtaining SERP Return Codes
SERP return codes indicate the quality of the input address as determined by the Canada Post's
Software Evaluation and Recognition Program regulations.
To obtain SERP return codes, on the Output Data tab, select the Include postal information check
box. This will return a variety of data about the address, including the SERP return codes. For
information on the specific data that this option will return, see Postal Data Output on page 180.
SERP return codes are provided in the following output field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
170
Stages Reference
Table 67: SERP Return Code Output
Field Name
Description
CanadianSERPCode
Validation/correction return code (Canadian addresses only):
V
The input was valid. Canada Post defines a "valid" address as an address
that meets all the following requirements:
Note: There are exceptions. For further information, contact the
CPC.
• The address must contain all required components as found in CPC's
Postal Code Data Files.
• The address must provide an exact match on all components for only one
address in CPC's Postal Code Data Files, allowing for acceptable alternate
words and names listed in the CPC Postal Code Data Files.
• Address components must be in a form that allows recognition without
ambiguity. Certain components may require "qualifiers" to identify them.
For instance, a Route Service address requires the key words "Rural Route"
or "RR" for differentiation from a "Suburban Service" or "SS" address with
the same number.
I
The input was invalid. An "invalid" address is one that does not meet CPC
requirements for a valid address (see above). Examples of this include
address components that are missing, invalid, or inconsistent.
C
The input was correctable. A "correctable" address is one that can be
corrected to match one, and only one, address.
N
The input was non-correctable. A "non-correctable" address is one that could
be corrected a number of different ways such that Validate Address cannot
identify a single correct version.
F
The input address was foreign (outside of Canada).
International Address Options
Addresses outside of the U.S. and Canada are referred to as "international" addresses. The following
options control international address processing:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
171
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
Enable international address processing
Specifies whether to process international addresses
(addresses outside the U.S. and Canada). If you enable
international address processing Validate Address will
attempt to validate international addresses. If you disable
international address processing, international addresses
will fail, meaning they is returned with an "F" in the Status
output field. The output field Status.Code will say
"DisabledCoder." If you are not licensed for international
address processing you must disable international address
processing in order for your jobs to complete successfully,
regardless of whether or not they contain international
addresses.
Note: You must have a valid license for
international address processing to successfully
process international addresses. If you enable
international address processing but are not
licensed for this feature, or your license has
expired, your entire job will fail.
Database
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies which database you want to use for validating
international addresses. To specify a database for
international address validation, select a database in the
Database drop-down list. Only databases that have been
defined in the INTL Database Resources panel in the
Management Console are available.
Addressing Guide
172
Stages Reference
Option Name
Description
International city and street searching
By default, Validate Address provides a balance of good
address matching accuracy with good performance. If you
are willing to trade matching accuracy for faster
performance, use the International city and street
searching field to increase processing speed. When you
do this, some accuracy is lost. This option only controls
performance for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada.
This setting affects a small percentage of records, mostly
addresses in the U.K. There is no performance control for
U.S. and Canadian address processing.
If you use Get Candidate Addresses, the candidate
addresses returned by Get Candidate Addresses may differ
from the multiple matches returned by Validate Address if
you set the performance tuning option for international
addresses to any value other than 100.
To control performance for addresses outside the U.S. and
Canada, use the International city and street searching
slider. To increase matching accuracy, move the slider to
the right. A value of 100 results in the greatest accuracy.
To increase processing speed, move the slider to the left.
A value of 0 results in the greatest processing speed.
Search address lines on fail
This option enables Validate Address to search the
AddressLine input fields for the city, state/province, postal
code, and country when the address cannot be matched
using the values in the City, StateProvince, and PostalCode
input fields.
Consider enabling this option if your input addresses have
the city, state/province, and postal code information in the
AddressLine fields.
Consider disabling this option if your input addresses use
the City, State/Province and PostalCode fields. If you enable
this option and these fields are used, there is an increased
possibility that Validate Address will fail to correct values in
these fields (for example a misspelled city name).
Output
The output from Validate Address contains different information depending on the output categories
you select.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
173
Stages Reference
Standard Address Output
Standard address output consists of four lines of the address which correspond to how the address
would appear on an address label. City, state/province, postal code, and other data is also included
in standard address output. Standard address output is returned for validated addresses if you select
the Include a standard address check box. Standard address fields are always returned for
addresses that could not be validated. For non-validated addresses, the standard address output
fields contain the address as it appeared in the input ("pass through" data). If you want addresses
to be standardized according to postal authority standards when validation fails, select the Include
normalized data when no match is found check box.
Table 68: Standard Address Output
Field Name
Description
AdditionalInputData
Input data not used by the address validation process. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
AddressLine1
If the address was validated, the first line of the validated and standardized address.
If the address could not be validated, the first line of the input address without any
changes.
AddressLine2
If the address was validated, the second line of the validated and standardized
address. If the address could not be validated, the second line of the input address
without any changes.
AddressLine3
If the address was validated, the third line of the validated and standardized address.
If the address could not be validated, the third line of the input address without any
changes.
AddressLine4
If the address was validated, the fourth line of the validated and standardized address.
If the address could not be validated, the fourth line of the input address without any
changes.
AddressLine5
For U.K. addresses only. If the address was validated, the fifth line of the validated
and standardized address. If the address could not be validated, the fifth line of the
input address without any changes.
City
The validated city name.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
174
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Country
The country in the format determined by what you selected in Country format:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ISO Code
UPU Code
English
French
German
Spanish
DepartmentName
For U.K. addresses only, a subdivision of a firm. For example, Engineering
Department.
FirmName
The validated firm or company name.
PostalCode
The validated ZIP Code™ or postal code.
PostalCode.AddOn
The 4-digit add-on part of the ZIP Code™. For example, in the ZIP Code™
60655-1844, 1844 is the 4-digit add-on. (U.S. addresses only.)
PostalCode.Base
The 5-digit ZIP Code™; for example 20706 (U.S. addresses only).
StateProvince
The validated state or province abbreviation.
USUrbanName
The validated urbanization name. (U.S. addresses only.) This is used primarily for
Puerto Rico addresses.
Parsed Address Elements Output
Output addresses are formatted in the parsed address format if you select the Include matched
address elements check box. If you want Validate Address to return formatted data in the Parsed
Address format when validation fails (that is, a normalized address), select the Return normalized
data when no match is found check box.
Note: If you always want return parsed input data returned regardless of whether or not
validation is successful, select Include standardized input address elements. For more
information, see Parsed Input on page 178.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
175
Stages Reference
Table 69: Parsed Address Output
Field Name
Description
AdditionalInputData
Input data not used by Validate Address. For more
information, see Additional Input Data on page 207.
AdditionalInputData.Base
Input data that was not output to the standardized address
by Validate Address. For more information, see Additional
Input Data on page 207.
AdditionalInputData.Unmatched
Input data passed to the matcher but not used by Validate
Address for validation. For more information, see Additional
Input Data on page 207.
ApartmentLabel
Apartment designator (such as STE or APT), for example:
123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentLabel2
Secondary apartment designator, for example: 123 E Main
St APT 3, 4th Floor
Note: In this release, this field will always be blank.
ApartmentNumber
Apartment number. For example: 123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentNumber2
Secondary apartment number. For example: 123 E Main St
APT 3, 4th Floor
Note: In this release, this field will always be blank.
CanadianDeliveryInstallationAreaName
Delivery installation name (Canadian addresses only)
CanadianDeliveryInstallationQualifierName
Delivery installation qualifier (Canadian addresses only)
CanadianDeliveryInstallationType
Delivery installation type (Canadian addresses only)
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
176
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
City
Validated city name
Country
Country. Format is determined by what you selected in
Country format:
• ISO Code
• UPU Code
• English
DepartmentName
For U.K. addresses only, a subdivision of a firm. For
example, Engineering Department.
FirmName
The validated firm or company name
HouseNumber
House number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
LeadingDirectional
Leading directional, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
POBox
Post office box number. If the address is a rural route
address, the rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode
Validated postal code. For U.S. addresses, this is the ZIP
Code.
PrivateMailbox
Private mailbox indicator.
PrivateMailbox.Type
The type of private mailbox. Possible values include:
• Standard
• Non-Standard
Note: This replaces PrivateMailboxType (no period
in field name). Please modify your API calls
accordingly.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
177
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
RRHC
Rural Route/Highway Contract indicator
StateProvince
Validated state or province name
StreetName
Street name, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
StreetSuffix
Street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
TrailingDirectional
Trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
USUrbanName
USPS® urbanization name. Puerto Rican addresses only.
Parsed Input
The output can include the input address in parsed form. This type of output is referred to as "parsed
input." Parsed input fields contain the address data that was used as input regardless of whether
or not Validate Address validated the address. Parsed input is different from the "parsed address
elements" output in that parsed address elements contain the validated address if the address could
be validated, and, optionally, the input address if the address could not be validated. Parsed input
always contains the input address regardless of whether or not Validate Address validated the
address.
To include parsed input fields in the output, select the Return parsed input data check box.
Table 70: Parsed Input
Field Name
Description
ApartmentLabel.Input
Apartment designator (such as STE or APT), for example:
123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentNumber.Input
Apartment number, for example: 123 E Main St APT 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
178
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
CanadianDeliveryInstallationAreaName.Input
Delivery installation name (Canadian addresses only)
CanadianDeliveryInstallationQualifierName.Input
Delivery installation qualifier (Canadian addresses only)
CanadianDeliveryInstallationType.Input
Delivery installation type (Canadian addresses only)
City.Input
Validated city name
Country.Input
Country. Format is determined by what you selected in
Country format:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ISO Code
UPU Code
English
French
German
Spanish
FirmName.Input
The validated firm or company name
HouseNumber.Input
House number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
LeadingDirectional.Input
Leading directional, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
POBox.Input
Post office box number. If the address is a rural route
address, the rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode.Input
Validated postal code. For U.S. addresses, this is the ZIP
Code.
PrivateMailbox.Input
Private mailbox indicator
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
179
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
PrivateMailbox.Type.Input
The type of private mailbox. Possible values include:
• Standard
• Non-Standard
RRHC.Input
Rural Route/Highway Contract indicator
StateProvince.Input
Validated state or province name
StreetName.Input
Street name, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
StreetSuffix.Input
Street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
TrailingDirectional.Input
Trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
USUrbanName.Input
USPS® urbanization name
Postal Data Output
If you select Include postal information then the following fields are returned in the output.
Table 71: Postal Data Output
Field Name
Description
CanadianSERPCode
Validation/correction return code (Canadian addresses only). For more information,
see Obtaining SERP Return Codes on page 170.
IntHexaviaCode
For addresses in France only, a numeric code that represents the street. For
information about Hexavia codes, see www.laposte.fr.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
180
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
IntINSEECode
For addresses in France only, a numeric code that represents the city. For a listing
of INSEE codes, see www.insee.fr.
PostalBarCode
The two-digit delivery point portion of the delivery point barcode (U.S. addresses
only). For more information, see Creating Delivery Point Barcodes on page 145.
USAltAddr
Indicates whether or not alternate address matching logic was used, and if so which
logic was used (U.S. addresses only). One of the following:
null
No alternate address scheme used.
D
Delivery point alternate logic was used.
E
Enhanced highrise alternate match logic was used.
S
Small town default logic was used.
U
Unique ZIP Code logic was used.
USBCCheckDigit
Check-digit portion of the 11-digit delivery point barcode (U.S. addresses only). For
more information, see Creating Delivery Point Barcodes on page 145.
USCarrierRouteCode
Carrier route code (U.S. addresses only). For more information, see Obtaining
Carrier Route Codes on page 144.
USCongressionalDistrict
Congressional district (U.S. addresses only). For more information, see Obtaining
Congressional Districts on page 143.
USCountyName
County name (U.S. addresses only). For more information, see Obtaining County
Names on page 144.
USFinanceNumber
The finance number in which the address resides (U.S. addresses only). The finance
number is a number assigned by the USPS to an area that covers multiple ZIP Codes.
An address is validated only if its finance number matches the finance number of the
candidate address in the U.S. Database.
USFIPSCountyNumber
FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standards) county number (U.S. addresses
only). For more information, see Obtaining FIPS County Numbers on page 144.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
181
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
USLACS
Indicates whether or not the address is a candidate for LACS
addresses only). One of the following:
Link
Link
conversion (U.S.
Link
Y
Yes, the address is a candidate for LACS
processing. If LACS
is enabled,
Link
an attempt is made to convert the address using the LACS
database. If the
conversion attempt is successful, the output address is the new address
Link
obtained from the LACS
database. If the attempt is not successful, the
address will not be converted.
N
No, the address is not a candidate for LACS
processing. LACS
Link
processing may still be attempted if LACS
processing is requested, the
Link
LACS
database is installed, and one of the following is true:
Link
Link
• The address matches to a Rural Route address and the RecordType.Default
field returns a Y.
• The input address could not be matched to any address in the U.S. Postal
Link
Database (Failures due to multiple matches are not LACS
candidates.)
USLastLineNumber
A six-character alphanumeric value that groups together ZIP Codes that share the
same primary city. For example, addresses with the following two last lines would
have the same last line number:
Chantilly VA 20151
Chantilly VA 20152
Result Indicators
Result indicators provide information about the kinds of processing performed on an address. There
are two types of result indicators:
Record-Level Result Indicators
Record-level result indicators provide data about the results of Validate Address processing for each
record, such as the success or failure of the match attempt, which coder processed the address,
and other details. The following table lists the record-level result indicators returned by Validate
Address.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
182
Stages Reference
Table 72: Record Level Indicators
Field Name
Description
AddressFormat
The type of address data being returned:
F
French format (for example: 123 Rue Main)
E
English format (for example: 123 Main St)
Confidence
The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range is from zero (0)
to 100; zero indicates failure, 100 indicates a very high level of confidence that the match
results are correct. For multiple matches, the confidence level is 0. For details about how
this number is calculated, see Introduction to the Validate Address Confidence
Algorithm on page 276.
CouldNotValidate
If no match was found, which address component could not be validated:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ApartmentNumber
HouseNumber
StreetName
PostalCode
City
Directional
StreetSuffix
Firm
POBoxNumber
RuralRoute
Note: More than one component may be returned, in a comma-separated list.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
183
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
CountryLevel
The category of address matching available. This is always "A" for U.S. and Canadian
addresses. One of the following:
A
The address is in a country for which there is highly detailed postal data available.
Addresses in this match level can have the following address elements validated
and corrected, and added if missing from the input:
•
•
•
•
•
B
The address is in a country for which there is a medium level of postal data
available. Addresses in this match level can have the following address elements
validated and corrected, and added if missing from the input:
•
•
•
•
C
Postal code
City name
State/county name
Street address elements
Country name
Postal code
City name
State/county name
Country name
The address is in a country for which the postal data is least detailed. Addresses
in this match level can have the following actions performed on them:
• Validate and correct country name (cannot supply missing country name)
• Validate the format of the postal code (cannot supply missing postal code or
validate the code)
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
184
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
MatchScore
MatchScore provides an indication of the degree to which the output address is correct.
It is significantly different from Confidence in that Confidence is indicates how much the
input address changed to obtain a match, whereas the meaning of Match Score varies
between U.S. and non-U.S. addresses.
For U.S. addresses, MatchScore is a one-digit score on a scale of 0 to 9 that reflects the
closeness of the street-name match (after transformations by Validate Address, if any).
Zero indicates an exact match and 9 indicates the least likely match. If no match was
found, this field is blank.
For non-U.S. and non-Canadian addresses, MatchScore is a five-digit score, with a
maximum value of 00999. Higher numbers indicates a closer match.
This field does not apply to Canadian addresses.
Note that you cannot equate match scores from U.S. addresses with those of non-U.S.
addresses. For example, a match score of 4 for a U.S address does not indicate the same
level of match as a 00004 for a non-U.S. address.
Note: The Validate Address and Advanced Matching Module components both
use the MatchScore field. The MatchScore field value in the output of a dataflow
is determined by the last stage to modify the value before it is sent to an output
stage. If you have a dataflow that contains Validate Address and Advanced
Matching Module components and you want to see the MatchScore field output
for each stage, use a Transformer stage to copy the MatchScore value to another
field. For example, Validate Address produces an output field called MatchScore
and then a Transformer stage copies the MatchScore field from Validate Address
to a field called AddressMatchScore. When the matcher stage runs it populates
the MatchScore field with the value from the matcher and passes through the
AddressMatchScore value from Validate Address.
MultimatchCount
If multiple matches were found, indicates the number of records that are possible matches.
MultipleMatches
Indicates which address component had multiple matches, if multiple matches were found:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Firm
LeadingDirectional
PostalCode
StreetName
StreetSuffix
TrailingDirectional
Urbanization
Note: More than one component may be returned, in a comma-separated list.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
185
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
ProbableCorrectness
Relative probable correctness of the overall match that was found:
Blank
No match was found.
0
Match is most likely correct.
1-8
Intermediate match levels on a sliding scale.
9
Match is least likely to be correct.
Note: These values reflect the program's estimate of “relative probable
correctness” only. It is possible that some matches given a score of 0 are not
correct, and probable that matches given a score of 9 are nevertheless correct.
ProcessedBy
RecordType
Which address coder processed the address:
USA
U.S. address coder
CAN
Canadian address coder
INT
International address coder
Type of address record, as defined by U.S. and Canadian postal authorities (supported
for U.S. and Canadian addresses only):
•
•
•
•
•
•
RecordType.Default
Status
FirmRecord
GeneralDelivery
HighRise
PostOfficeBox
RRHighwayContract
Normal
Code indicating the "default" match:
Y
The address matches a default record.
null
The address does not match a default record.
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt. For multiple matches, this field is "F"
for all the possible matches.
null
Success
F
Failure
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
186
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Status.Code
Reason for failure, if there is one. For multiple matches, all possible matches is
"MultipleMatchesFound."
•
•
•
•
Status.Description
DisabledCoder
InsufficientInputData
MultipleMatchesFound
UnableToValidate
Description of the problem, if there is one.
Possible Multiple Addresses Found This value will appear if
Status.Code=MultipleMatchesFound.
Address Not Found
This value will appear if
Status.Code=UnableToValidate.
PerformUSProcessing disabled
This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
PerformCanadianProcessing
disabled
This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
PerformInternationalProcessing
disabled
This value will appear if
Status.Code=DisabledCoder.
Field-Level Result Indicators
Field-level result indicators describe how Validate Address handled each address element. Field-level
result indicators are returned in the qualifier "Result". For example, the field-level result indicator
for HouseNumber is contained in HouseNumber.Result.
To enable field-level result indicators, check the Include result codes for individual fields check
box. For more information, see Output Data Options on page 139.
The following table lists the field-level result indicators. If a particular field does not apply to an
address, the result indicator may be blank.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
187
Stages Reference
Table 73: Field-Level Result Indicators
Field Name
Description
AddressRecord.Result
These result codes apply to international addresses only.
ApartmentLabel.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. and Canadian addresses only. For more
information, see Additional Input Data on page
207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
R
The apartment label is required but is missing from
the input address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
188
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
ApartmentNumber.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. U.S. addresses that are an EWS match will
have a value of P. U.S. and Canadian addresses
only.
R
The apartment number is required but is missing
from the input address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
189
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
City.Result
Country.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Hyphens missing or punctuation errors. Canadian
addresses only.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output.
R
The city is required but is missing from the input
address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian
addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
These result codes do not apply to U.S. or Canadian
addresses.
Addressing Guide
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
190
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
FirmName.Result
HouseNumber.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
C
Corrected. U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
U
Unmatched. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input. U.S. addresses
only.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
O
Out of range. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian
addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
R
The house number is required but is missing from
the input address. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian
addresses.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
191
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
LeadingDirectional.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. Non-blank input was corrected to a
non-blank value. U.S. addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. U.S.
addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input. Does not apply to
Canadian addresses.
192
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
POBox.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple matches. The input address matched
multiple records in the postal database, and each
matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
R
The P.O. Box number is required but is missing
from the input address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
193
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
PostalCode.Result
PostalCodeCity.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records
in the postal database, and each matching record
has a different value in this field. Does not apply to
Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
R
The postal code is required but is missing from the
input address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian
addresses.
U
Unmatched. For example, if the street name does
not match the postal code, both StreetName.Result
and PostalCode.Result will contain U.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
These result codes apply to international addresses only.
Addressing Guide
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
194
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
PostalCode.Source
These result codes apply to U.S. addresses only.
™
FinanceNumber The ZIP Code in the input was verified
®
by using USPS Finance Number
groupings.
ZIPMOVE
PostalCode.Type
RRHC.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
™
The ZIP Code in the input address was
®
corrected because the USPS redrew
™
ZIP Code boundaries and the address
™
is now in a different ZIP Code .
™
P
The ZIP Code contains only PO Box addresses.
U.S. addresses only.
U
The ZIP Code is a unique ZIP Code assigned
to a specific company or location. U.S. addresses
only.
M
The ZIP Code is for military addresses. U.S.
addresses only.
null
The ZIP Code is a standard ZIP Code .
™
™
™
™
™
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
M
Multiple matches. The input address matched
multiple records in the postal database, and each
matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
R
The rural route/highway contract is required but is
missing from the input address. U.S. addresses
only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
U
Unmatched. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
195
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
RRHC.Type
These result codes apply to U.S. addresses only.
StateProvince.Result
Street.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
HC
The address is a Highway Contract address.
RR
The address is a Rural Route address.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. addresses only.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output.
R
The state is required but is missing from the input
address. U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian
addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
These result codes apply to international addresses only.
Addressing Guide
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output.
R
Street corrected. House number is out of range.
Applies to French, UK, and Japanese records only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
196
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetName.AbbreviatedAlias.Result
Indicates the result of abbreviated alias processing. One of
the following:
StreetName.Alias.Type
null
No abbreviated alias processing attempted.
B
The StreetName field contains the base street
name.
L
The standardized address length is less than 31
characters so the StreetName field contains the
base name.
N
No abbreviated alias found.
Y
An abbreviated alias was found for input address.
The StreetName field contains the abbreviated
alias.
This result code applies to U.S. addresses only.
Note: In previous releases this field was named
StreetName.AliasType with no "." between "Alias"
and "Type." This old name is obsolete. Please
update your processes to use the new name
StreetName.Alias.Type.
Abbreviated The alias is an abbreviation of the street
name. For example, HARTS-NM RD is an
abbreviated alias for HARTSVILLE NEW
MARLBORO RD.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
Changed
There has been an official street name
change and the alias reflects the new name.
For example if SHINGLE BROOK RD is
changed to CANNING DR, then CANNING
DR would be a changed alias type.
Other
The street alias is made up of other names
for the street or common abbreviations of the
street.
Preferred
The street alias is the locally preferred alias.
For example, a street is named "South Shore
Dr." because it runs along the southern shore
of a lake, not because it is south of a
municipal demarcation line. So, "South" is
not a predirectional in this case and should
not be shorted to "S". So, "South Shore Dr."
would be the preferred alias.
197
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetName.PreferredAlias.Result
Indicates the result of preferred alias processing. One of
the following:
StreetName.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
null
No preferred alias processing attempted.
A
Preferred alias processing was not attempted
because the input address matched to an alias.
Preferred alias processing is only attempted for
base addresses.
N
No preferred alias found.
Y
A preferred alias was found for the input address.
The StreetName field contains the preferred alias.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. addresses only. For more information, see
Additional Input Data on page 207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. U.S.
addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
198
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetSuffix.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. and Canadian addresses only. For more
information, see Additional Input Data on page
207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. U.S.
addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
199
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
TrailingDirectional.Result
USUrbanName.Result
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
D
Dropped. The field provided on input was removed.
U.S. and Canadian addresses only. For more
information, see Additional Input Data on page
207.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was
changed to conform to postal standards. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field. U.S.
addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the
validation process, but it was preserved in the
output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard
abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
These result codes apply to U.S. addresses only.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input
field.
C
Corrected.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple
records in the postal database, and each matching
record has a different value in this field.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and
remained unchanged from input.
Output from Options
Validate Address returns additional data depending on the options you select. For information on
the output generated by each option, see the options listed in the following sections:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
200
Stages Reference
Enhanced Line of Travel Output
Enhanced Line of Travel processing produces the following output.
Field Name
Description
USLOTCode
Line of Travel sequence code and an indicator denoting USPS® LOT sequence.
This field is in the format nnnnY where:
nnnn
The four-digit LOT code.
Y
One of the following:
• A—Ascending LOT sequence
• D—Descending LOT sequence
USLOTHex
A hexadecimal value that allows you to sort your file in ascending order only. The
hexadecimal values range from 0 to FF ascending, then FF through 0 descending.
USLOTSequence
A two-byte value used for final sortation in place of the DPC add-on. It consists of
an uppercase letter followed by a digit 0 through 9. Values range from A0 (99
descending) through J9 (00 descending), and K0 (00 ascending) through T9 (99
ascending).
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
201
Stages Reference
Link
LACS
Output
Field Name
Description
USLACS
Indicates whether or not the address is a candidate for LACS
addresses only). One of the following:
Link
conversion (U.S.
Link
Link
Y
Yes, the address is a candidate for LACS
processing. If LACS
is
enabled, Validate Address will attempt to convert the address using the
Link
LACS
database. If the conversion attempt is successful, the output address
Link
is the new address obtained from the LACS
database. If the attempt is not
successful, the address will not be converted.
N
No, the address is not a candidate for LACS
processing. LACS
Link
processing may still be attempted if LACS
processing is requested, the
Link
LACS
database is installed, and one of the following is true:
Link
Link
• The address matches to a Rural Route address and the RecordType.Default
field returns a Y.
• The input address could not be matched to any address in the U.S. Postal
Link
Database (Failures due to multiple matches are not LACS
candidates.)
USLACS.ReturnCode
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Link
Indicates the success or failure of LACS
processing. (U.S. addresses only.)
Link
Link
A
LACS
processing successful. Record matched through LACS
processing.
00
LACS
processing failed. No matching record found during LACS
processing.
09
LACS
processing matched the input address to an older highrise
default address. The address has been converted. Rather than provide
Link
an imprecise address, LACS
processing does not provide a new
address.
14
LACS
processing failed. Match found during LACS
processing
®
but conversion did not occur due to other USPS regulations.
92
LACS
processing successful. Record matched through LACS
processing. Unit number dropped on input.
null
LACS
did not process the record, or LACS
attempted.
Link
Link
Link
Link
Link
Link
Link
Addressing Guide
Link
Link
processing was not
202
Stages Reference
RDI Output
Field Name
Description
RDI
Return values indicating address type.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
B
The address is a business address.
R
The address is a residential address.
M
The address is both a residential and a business address.
null
Not checked because the address did not code at a ZIP + 4 level,
™
or RDI was not performed.
Addressing Guide
®
203
Stages Reference
DPV and CMRA Output
Field Name
Description
DPV
Indicates the results of Delivery Point Validation (DPV) processing.
Y
DPV confirmed. Mail can be delivered to the address.
N
Mail cannot be delivered to the address.
S
The building number was validated but the unit number could not be
confirmed. A building number is the primary address number for a building.
A unit number is a number of a distinct mailing address within a building
such as an apartment, suite, floor, and so on. For example, in this address
424 is the building number and 12 is the unit number:
424 Washington Blvd. Apt. 12
Oak Park IL 60302
USA
D
The building number was validated but the unit number was missing from
input. A building number is the primary address number for a building. A
unit number is a number of a distinct mailing address within a building such
as an apartment, suite, floor, and so on. For example, in this address 424
is the building number and 12 is the unit number:
424 Washington Blvd. Apt. 12
Oak Park IL 60302
USA
CMRA
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
M
The address matches multiple valid delivery points.
U
The address could not be confirmed because the address did not code at
®
the ZIP + 4 level.
V
The address caused a false-positive violation.
Indicates if the address is a Commercial Mail Receiving Agency (CMRA)
Y
Yes, the address is a CMRA.
N
No, the address is not a CMRA.
U
Unconfirmed.
Addressing Guide
204
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
DPVFootnote
DPV footnote codes.
DPVVacant
DPVNoStat
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
®
AA
Input address matched to the ZIP + 4 file.
A1
Input address not matched to the ZIP + 4 file.
BB
Input address matched to DPV (all components).
CC
Input address primary number matched to DPV but secondary
number not match (present but not valid).
F1
Input address is military; DPV bypassed.
G1
Input address is general delivery; DPV bypassed.
M1
Input address primary number missing.
M3
Input address primary number invalid.
N1
Input address primary number matched to DPV but high rise
address missing secondary number.
P1
Input address missing RR or HC Box number.
P3
Input address missing PO, RR, or HC Box number
RR
Input address matched to CMRA.
R1
Input address matched to CMRA but secondary number not
present.
U1
Input address is unique ZIP; DPV bypassed.
®
Indicates whether the building is vacant (unoccupied for 90 days). One of the
following:
Y
Yes, the building is vacant.
N
No, the building is not vacant.
null
The Determine if address is vacant option was not turned on.
Indicates whether the building is a "no stat" building and therefore unable to receive
mail. One of the following:
Y
Yes, the building is a "no stat" building, which means the building is
not receiving mail.
N
No, the building is not a "no stat" building, which means the building
does receive mail.
null
The Determine if delivery point is active option was not turned on.
Addressing Guide
205
Stages Reference
Link
Suite
Output
Field Name
Description
SuiteLinkReturnCode
Indicates whether or not Validate Address corrected the secondary address
information (U.S. addresses only). One of the following:
A
Validate Address corrected the secondary address information.
00
Validate Address did not correct the secondary address information.
null
Suite
Link
XX
SuiteLinkMatchCode
Suite
processing encountered an error. For example, an error
Link
would occur if the Suite
database is expired.
Link
Provides additional information on the Suite
only)
match attempt. (U.S. addresses
A
Validate Address corrected the secondary address information.
B
Validate Address did not correct the secondary address information. No
additional detail about the match attempt is available.
C
The words in the FirmName field are all "noise" words. Noise words are
®
defined by the USPS and are ignored when attempting to mach the firm
name. Examples of noise words are "company" and "corporation". Validate
Address is not able to correct secondary address information for firm
names that consist entirely of noise words. For example "Company and
Corporation" is all noise words.
D
The address is not a high-rise default address. Suite
matching is only
done for high-rise default addresses. A high-rise default is a default to use
when the address does not contain valid secondary information (the
apartment number or apartment type is missing).
E
Suite
null
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
was not performed.
Link
Link
Link
processing failed because the Suite
Link
was not performed or there was an error.
Suite
Addressing Guide
Link
database is expired.
206
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
SuiteLinkFidelity
Indicates how well Validate Address matched the firm name to the firm names in
Link
the Suite
database.
Link
1
The firm name matches the Suite
database exactly.
2
Good match. All words in the firm name except one matched the firm
Link
name in the Suite
database.
3
Poor match. More than one word in the firm name did not match the
Link
firm name in the Suite
database.
null
Suite
could not match the firm name, or was not performed, or there
was an error.
Link
VeriMove Output
Field Name
Description
VeriMoveDataBlock
Indicates whether or not Validate Address should return a 250-byte field containing
input data to pass to VeriMove Express. This field contains the Detail Results
Indicator data required by VeriMove. For more information about the contents of
this field, see the VeriMove User’s Guide. One of the following:
Y
Yes, return the field VeriMoveDataBlock..
N
No, do not return the field VeriMoveDataBlock.
Additional Input Data
Some input data is ignored during the address standardization process. This extraneous data
(sometimes referred to as "dropped data") is returned in the AdditionalInputData field. Some examples
of dropped data include:
• Delivery instructions (for example, "Leave at back door")
• Phone numbers (for example, "555-135-8792")
• Attention lines (for example, "Attn: John Smith")
Data such as this is generally not embedded in an address. If it is embedded, the extraneous data
can usuall be identified and returned in the AdditionalInputData field.
Note: Dropped data from split indicia addresses is not returned. A split indicia address is
one where a primary address is split between multiple address lines. For example, if the
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
207
Stages Reference
primary address is "1 Green River Valley Rd" then the following would be a split indicia version
of this address:
1 Green River
Valley Rd
01230
If there is more than one piece of dropped data in an address, each piece of data is separated by
a semicolon and a space ("; ") for U.S. addresses and a space for addresses outside the U.S. The
order of dropped data in AdditionalInputData is:
1. Care of, mail stop (U.S. addresses only)
2. Other extraneous data found on address lines
3. Entire unused data lines
For example, if this is the input address:
123 Main St C/O John Smith
Apt 5 Drop at back dock
jsmith@example.com
555-123-4567
05674
Then AdditionalInputData would contain:
C/O John Smith; Apt 5 Drop At Back Dock; 555-123-4567; Jsmith@example.com; 555-123-4567
Care of Data
For U.S. addresses only, "care of" data is returned in AdditionalInputData. The following addresses
contain examples of "care of" data:
123 Main St C/O John Smith
Apt 5
05674
123 Main St
Apt 5 ATTN John Smith
05674
123 Main St Apt 5
MailStop 2
05674
Extraneous Data on Its Own Address Line
Validate Address returns extraneous data on its own address line for U.S. and Canadian addresses.
For U.S. addresses, Validate Address uses the first two non-blank address lines to perform address
standardization, unless either the firm name extraction or urbanization code extraction options are
enabled (see Address Line Processing for U.S. Addresses on page 139 for more information).
Data on other address lines is returned in AdditionalInputData. In the following address, "John Smith"
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
208
Stages Reference
would be returned in AdditionalInputData because it is in the third non-blank address line and Validate
Address only uses the first two non-blank address lines for U.S. addresses.
123 Main St
Apt 5
John Smith
05674
If one of either of the first two non-blank address lines contains extraneous data, that data is returned
in AdditionalInputData. For example, in the following addresses "John Smith" would be returned in
AdditionalAddressData.
123 Main St
John Smith
05674
John Smith
123 Main St
05674
In the following address both "John Smith" and "Apt 5" would both be returned in AdditionalInputData.
"John Smith" would be returned because it is extraneous data in one of the first two address lines
and "Apt 5" would be returned because U.S. address data must be in the first two non-blank address
lines.
John Smith
123 Main St
Apt 5
05674
Extraneous Data Within an Address Line
Extraneous data that is within an address line is returned in AdditionalInputData. For example, in
the following addresses "John Smith" would be returned in AdditionalInputData.
123 Main St John Smith
05674
123 Main St Apt 5 John Smith
05674
123 Main St John Smith
Apt 5
05674
123 Main St
Apt 5 John Smith
05674
For U.S. addresses, only extraneous data at the end of the address line is returned in
AdditionalInputData. Extraneous data that is not at the end of an address line is not returned for
U.S. addresses. For example, in the following addresses "John Smith" is not returned.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
209
Stages Reference
John Smith 123 Main St
05674
123 Main John Smith St
05674
The AdditionalInputData field will sometimes contain the original street name or suffix if the street
name was changed to obtain a match and the street name or suffix was at the end of a line. For
example this address:
Pitney Bowes
4200 Parlament
Lanham MD
Validate Address would correct the spelling of the street name and add the suffix, returning "4200
Parliament Pl" as the corrected street address and "Parlament" in AdditionalInputData.
Dual Addresses
A dual address is an address that contains both street and PO Box/Rural Route/Highway Contract
information. Depending on the processing options you select, the portion of the dual address that
is not used for address standardization may be returned in AdditionalInputData. For more information,
see About Dual Address Logic on page 149.
Reports
USPS CASS 3553 Report
The USPS CASS 3553 report must be given to the USPS along with the mailing to qualify for certain
discounts. The report contains information about the software you used for CASS processing, your
name-and-address list, your output file, the mailer, and other statistics about your mailing. For details
about USPS Form 3553, see www.usps.com.
For information about CASS settings see CASS Certified Processing on page 160. For instructions
on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow Designer Guide.
USPS CASS Detail Report
The USPS CASS Detailed Report does not need to be given to the USPS to qualify for certain
discounts. This report contains some of the same information as the 3553 report but provides much
greater detail about DPV, LACS, and SuiteLink statistics.
For more information about CASS settings see CASS Certified Processing on page 160. For
instructions on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow Designer
Guide.
Validate Address Summary Report
The Validate Address Summary Report lists statistics about the job, such as the total number of
records processed, the number of addresses validated, and more.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
210
Stages Reference
For instructions on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow Designer
Guide.
Validate Address AUS
Validate Address AUS standardizes and validates Australian addresses using Australia Post address
data. It also adds missing postal information, such as postal codes, city names, state/territory names,
and more.
Validate Address AUS also returns result indicators about validation attempts, such as whether or
not Validate Address AUS validated the address, and the reason for failure if the address could not
be validated.
During address matching and standardization, Validate Address AUS separates address lines into
components and compares them to the contents of a Universal Addressing Module database. If a
match is found, the input address is standardized to the database information.
Validate Address AUS is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
Validate Address AUS takes a standard address as input. All addresses use this format.
Table 74: Input Format
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String
[288]
The first address line.
AddressLine2
String
[288]
The second address line.
AddressLine3
String
[288]
The third address line.
AddressLine4
String
[288]
The fourth address line.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
211
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
City
String [48] The city/locality/suburb name. This can optionally be entered into one
of the AddressLine fields along with the State and Postal Code.
StateProvince
String [4]
The state. This can optionally be entered into one of the AddressLine
fields along with the City and Postal Code.
PostalCode
String [8]
The postal code. This can optionally be entered into one of the
AddressLine fields along with the State and City.
Options
Validate Address AUS provides several options that enable you to control how addresses are
processed and the type of information returned.
Table 75: Options
Option
Description
Database
Specifies the database to be used for Australian address validation. Only databases
that have been defined in the Australia Database Resources panel in the
Management Console are available.
Include result codes for individual
fields
Outputs result fields associated with certain output elements. See Result Codes
on page 214.
Include original input data
Returns the original input data. See Original Input Data on page 217.
Include parsed address elements
Returns parsed address elements. See Parsed Address Elements on page 215.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
212
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Format data using AMAS
conventions
Specifies that output address data is to be formatted using Address Matching
Approval System (AMAS) conventions.
This option causes Validate Address AUS to use AMAS rules when standardizing
an address. AMAS is an Australia Post program for enforcing addressing standards.
For more information on the AMAS formatting conventions, refer to the Address
Matching Approval System (AMAS) Handbook.
This option modifies the output data as follows.
• Numeric fields are padded with zeros. This affects the following output fields:
HouseNumber, HouseNumber2, PostalDeliveryNumber, and DPID. For example,
if the input address is 298 New South Head Rd Double Bay NSW 2028, then the
format of the HouseNumber field is changed from 298 to 00298.
• If a match is not made, then all digits in the DPID field will be zero. For example,
00000000.
• If a match is not made, then all return fields (parsed address elements) will be
blank, except numeric fields which will contain all zeros.
• The CCD field is not output.
Output
At a minimum, the output of Validate Address AUS consists of the standard output fields listed in
Standard Output Fields on page 213. In addition to these standard fields, the output may also
include other information, depending on the output options you select. For more information on the
optional output fields, see Result Codes on page 214, Parsed Address Elements on page 215, and
Original Input Data on page 217.
Standard Output Fields
The following table lists the standard fields that are output by Validate Address AUS.
Table 76: Output Fields
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1
A formatted address line.
BuildingName
The building name.
City
The city/locality/suburb name 1.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
213
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
City2
The city/locality/suburb name 2 - split names e.g. VIA.
StateProvince
The state.
PostalCode
The postal code.
CCD
The Census Collection District. The basic geographic unit for collection, processing
and output of census data. In general, there are about 200 to 250 households per
CCD, and about 37,000 CCDs throughout Australia.
DPID
The Delivery Point Identifier. An eight-digit number from the Australia Post Postal
Address File that uniquely identifies a mail delivery point, such as a street address.
Status
The success or failure of the match attempt.
Status.Code
F
Failure (no DPID or CCD found)
null
Success
Reason for failure, if there is one.
• UnableToValidate
• InsufficientInputData
Status.Description
A description of the problem, if there is one.
AMAS.ResultCode
The result code returned by the underlying engine.
AMAS.ResultMessage
Any result messages returned by the underlying engine.
Result Codes
This option outputs result fields that are associated with certain output elements, as well as a result
code for each result field, if available. If a result field does not have an accompanying result code,
it may indicate one of the following:
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
214
Stages Reference
• No change was made to the parsed element
• The parsed element was standardized (e.g., 'Street' changed to 'ST')
• No data was parsed into a corresponding parsed address element
Table 77: Result Codes
Field Name
Result Code
City.Result
C
HouseNumber.Result
U
PostalCode.Result
C
Corrected
PostalDelivery.Result
C
Corrected
D
Dropped
U
Unmatched
StateProvince.Result
C
Corrected
StreetName.Result
C
Corrected
U
Unmatched, missing, or ambiguous
StreetSuffix.Result
Corrected
Unmatched, missing, or ambiguous
C
Corrected
Parsed Address Elements
This option outputs parsed address elements.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
215
Stages Reference
Table 78: Parsed Address Elements
Field Name
Description
ApartmentLabel
The flat or unit type (such as STE or APT), for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
ApartmentNumber
The flat or unit number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
FloorLabel
The floor/level type, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3, 4th Floor
FloorNumber
The floor/level number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3, 4th Floor
LotNumber
The lot number, for example: Lot 7 Caldwell Hwy
PostalDeliveryLabel
The postal delivery type, for example: PO Box 42
PostalDeliveryNumber
The postal delivery number, for example: PO Box 42
PostalDeliveryPrefix
The postal delivery number prefix, for example: PO Box A42
PostalDeliverySuffix
The postal delivery number suffix, for example: PO Box 42B
HouseNumber
The house number 1, for example: 298A-1B New South Head Rd
HouseSuffix
The house number 1 suffix, for example: 298A-1B New South Head Rd
HouseNumber2
The house number 2, for example: 298A-1B New South Head Rd
HouseSuffix2
The house number 2 suffix, for example: 298A-1B New South Head Rd
StreetName
The name of street where property is located, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
216
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetSuffix
The street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
TrailingDirectional
The trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
Original Input Data
This option outputs the original input data in <FieldName>.Input fields.
Table 79: Input Data
Field Name
Description
AddressLine1.Input
The first address line passed on input.
AddressLine2.Input
The second address line passed on input.
AddressLine3.Input
The third address line passed on input.
AddressLine4.Input
The fourth address line passed on input.
City.Input
The city/locality/suburb name passed on input.
StateProvince.Input
The state passed on input.
PostalCode.Input
The postal code passed on input.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
217
Stages Reference
Validate Address Global
Validate Address Global provides enhanced address standardization and validation for addresses
outside the U.S. and Canada. Validate Address Global can also validate addresses in the U.S. and
Canada but its strength is validation of addresses in other countries. If you process a significant
number of addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, you should consider using Validate Address
Global.
Validate Address Global is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Validate Address Global performs several steps to achieve a quality address, including transliteration,
parsing, validation, and formatting.
Character Set Mapping and Transliteration
Validate Address Global handles international strings and their complexities. It uses fully Unicode
enabled string processing which enables the transliteration of non-roman characters into the Latin
character set and mapping between different character sets.
Character set mapping and transliteration features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for over 30 different character sets including UTF-8, ISO 8859-1, GBK, BIG5, JIS, EBCDIC
Proper "elimination" of diacritics according to language rules
Transliteration for various alphabets into Latin Script
Greek (BGN/PCGN 1962, ISO 843 - 1997)
Cyrillic (BGN/PCGN 1947, ISO 9 - 1995)
Hebrew
Japanese Katakana, Hiragana and Kanji
Chinese Pinyin (Mandarin, Cantonese)
Korean Hangul
Address Parsing, Formatting, and Standardization
Restructuring incorrectly fielded address data is a complex and difficult task especially when done
for international addresses. People introduce many ambiguities as they enter address data into
computer systems. Among the problems are misplaced elements (such as company or personal
names in street address fields) or varying abbreviations that are not only language, but also country
specific. Validate Address Global identifies address elements in address lines and assigns them to
the proper fields. This is an important precursor to the actual validation. Without restructuring, "no
match" situations might result.
Properly identified address elements are also important when addresses have to be truncated or
shortened to fit specific field length requirements. With the proper information in the right fields,
specific truncation rules can be applied.
• Parses and analyzes address lines and identifies individual address elements
• Processes over 30 different character sets
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
218
Stages Reference
• Formats addresses according to the postal rules of the country of destination
• Standardizes address elements (such as changing AVENUE to AVE)
Global Address Validation
Address validation is the correction process where properly parsed address data is compared against
reference databases supplied by postal organizations or other data providers. Validate Address
Global validates individual address elements to check for correctness using sophisticated fuzzy
matching technology and produces standardized and formatted output based on postal standards
and user preferences. FastCompletion validation type can be used in quick address entry applications.
It allows input of truncated data in several address fields and generates suggestions based on this
input.
In some cases, it is not possible to fully validate an address. Here Validate Address Global has a
unique deliverability assessment feature that classifies addresses according to their probable
deliverability.
Input
Validate Address Global takes a standard address as input. All addresses use this format no matter
what country the address is from.
Table 80: Validate Address Global Input
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1 through
AddressLine6
String [79] These fields contain address line data. AddressLine1 contains the first
address line, AddressLine2 contains the second address line, and so
forth. Note that the city, state/province, and postal code information
should be placed in their respective fields, not address line fields. For
example:
AddressLine1: 17413 Blodgett Road
AddressLine2: PO Box 123
City: Mount Vernon
StateProvice: WA
PostalCode: 97273
Country: USA
If the input address is not already parsed into the appropriate address
line and City, StateProvice, and PostalCode fields, use the
UnformattedLine fields instead of the address line fields.
City
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
String [79] City name
Addressing Guide
219
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StateProvince
String [79] State or province.
PostalCode
String [79]: The postal code for the address. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code®.
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Contact
String [79] The name of the addressee. For example, "Mr. Jones".
Country
String [79] The name of the country. If no value is specified in the Force country
(ISO3) or Default country (ISO3) option, you must specify a country.
FirmName
String [79] The company or firm name.
Street
String [79] Street
Number
Building
[79]
Building
String [79] Building
SubBuilding
String [79] SubBuilding
DeliveryService
String [79] DeliveryService
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Number
Addressing Guide
220
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
String [79]
UnformattedLine1 through
UnformattedLine10
Description
Use these fields if the input address is completely unparsed and you
want Validate Address Global to attempt to parse the address into the
appropriate fields. For example:
UnformattedLine1: 17413 Blodgett Road
UnformattedLine2: PO Box 123
UnformattedLine3: Mount Vernon WA 97273
UnformattedLine4: USA
This address would be parsed into these output fields:
AddressLine1: 17413 Blodgett Road
AddressLine2: PO Box 123
City: Mount Vernon
StateProvice: WA
PostalCode: 97273
Country: USA
Note: If you specify input in the unformatted line fields you
must specify the entire address using only unformatted line
fields. Do not use other fields such as City or StateProvince in
combination with unformatted line fields.
Options
Input Options
Table 81: Validate Address Global Input Options
Option
Description/Valid Values
Database
Specifies the database resource containing the postal data to use for address validation.
Only databases that have been defined in the Global Database Resources panel in the
Management Console are available. For more information, see the Spectrum™ Technology
Platform Administration Guide.
Default country (ISO3 format)
Specifies a default country to use when the input record does not contain explicit country
information. Specify the country using the ISO3 country code. If you do not specify a default
country each input record must have the country specified in the Country input field. For
a list of ISO codes see ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
221
Stages Reference
Option
Force country (ISO3 format)
Format Delimiter
Description/Valid Values
Causes address records to be always treated as originating from the country specified
here, overriding the country in the address record and the default country. Specify the
country using the ISO3 country code. For a list of ISO codes, see ISO Country Codes
and Module Support.
Enables you to use non-standard formatting for multi-line addresses in input files.
Acceptable values for this field include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CRLF (default)
LF
CR
SEMICOLON ( 2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW ; WASHINGTON DC 20008)
COMMA (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW , WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
TAB (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
PIPE (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW | WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
SPACE (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW WASHINGTON DC 20008)
Note: The same value must be selected for both the input option and output
option.
Output Options
Table 82: Validate Address Global Output Options
Option
Maximum number of results
returned
Return input data with results
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
This option specifies the maximum number of candidate addresses to return. This
field is disabled for batch processing; for all other processing modes the default is
1 and the maximum is 99. If you are using FastCompletion mode, you may want to
enter a number greater than 1 to ensure you are provided with multiple options for
completing a field.
Specifies whether to include the input data in the output. If enabled, the output will
contain fields that end with .Input containing the corresponding input field. For
example, the output field AddressLine1.Input would contain the data specified in the
input field AddressLine1.
Addressing Guide
222
Stages Reference
Option
Description
State/Province
Specifies the format for the StateProvince field. One of the following.
Country format
Abbreviation
Return the abbreviation for the state or province. For
example, North Carolina would be returned as "NC".
Country standard
Return either the abbreviation or the full name depending
on the format used by the country's postal authority. (Default)
Extended
Return the full name of the state or province, not the
abbreviation. For example "North Carolina".
Specifies the language or code to use for the country name returned by Validate
Address Global.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Chinese
Danish
Dutch
English (default)
Finnish
French
German
Greek
Hungarian
ISO number (returns the ISO number for the country)
ISO2 (returns the two-character ISO country code)
ISO3 (returns the three-character ISO country code)
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Polish
Portuguese
Russian
Sanskrit
Spanish
Swedish
Addressing Guide
223
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Script/Alphabet
Specifies the alphabet in which the output should be returned. The alphabet in which
the data is returned differs from country to country. For most countries the output
will be Latin I regardless of the selected preferred language.
ASCII extended
ASCII characters with expansion of special
characters (e.g. Ö = OE)
ASCII simplified
ASCII characters
Database
(default) Latin I or ASCII characters (as per reference
database standard)
Latin
Latin I characters
Latin alternate
Latin I characters (alternative transliteration)
Postal admin alternate
Latin I or ASCII characters (local postal
administration alternative)
Postal admin preferred
Latin I or ASCII characters (as preferred by local
postal administration)
For countries that use an alphabet other than Latin I, the returned alphabet differs
from country to country. For more information, see Alphabets for Non-Latin 1
Countries on page 225.
Language
Casing
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Specifies the language in which the output should be returned. The alphabet in
which the data is returned differs from country to country, but for most countries the
output will be Latin, regardless of the selected preferred language.
Database
Language derived from reference data for each address.
Default.
English
English locality and state/province names output, if
available.
Specifies the casing of the output.
Native
Output will be based on the reference database standard.
Upper
Output will be in upper case for all countries.
Lower
Output will be in lower case for all countries.
Mixed
Casing determined by country-specific rules.
No change
For parse mode, returns the data the way it was entered. For
validation mode, uses the casing found in the reference data
and according to postal rules. Values that could not be checked
against the reference data will retain their input casing.
Addressing Guide
224
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Format Delimiter
Enables you to use non-standard formatting for multi-line addresses in the output.
Acceptable values for this field include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CRLF (default)
LF
CR
SEMICOLON ( 2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW ; WASHINGTON DC 20008)
COMMA (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW , WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
TAB (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
PIPE (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW | WASHINGTON DC 20008 )
SPACE (2101 MASSACHUSETTS AVE NW WASHINGTON DC 20008)
Note: The same value must be selected for both the input option and
output option.
Alphabets for Non-Latin 1 Countries
For countries that use an alphabet other than Latin I, the returned alphabet differs from country to
country. The following table shows how the output is returned for specific countries. All countries
that are not listed use the value specified in the Script/Alphabet field option.
Country Database Postal
admin
preferred
Postal
admin
alternate
Latin
RUS
Cyrillic
Cyrillic
Cyrillic
CYRILLIC_ISO CYRILLIC_BGN CYRILLIC_ISO CYRILLIC_ISO
+
+ LATIN
LATIN_SIMPLE
JPN
Kanji
Kanji
Kana
JAPANESE
JAPANESE
JAPANESE + JAPANESE +
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
CHN
Hanzi
Hanzi
Hanzi
CHINESE_
MANDARIN
CHINESE_
CANTONESE
CHINESE_
CHINESE_
MANDARIN + MANDARIN +
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
HKG
Hanzi
Hanzi
Hanzi
CHINESE_
CANTONESE
CHINESE_
MANDARIN
CHINESE_
CHINESE_
CANTONESE CANTONESE
+
+ LATIN
LATIN_SIMPLE
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
Latin
alternate
ASCII
simplified
ASCII
extended
225
Stages Reference
Country Database Postal
admin
preferred
Postal
admin
alternate
Latin
Latin
alternate
ASCII
simplified
TWN
Hanzi
Hanzi
Hanzi
CHINESE_
CANTONESE
CHINESE_
MANDARIN
CHINESE_
CHINESE_
CANTONESE CANTONESE
+
+ LATIN
LATIN_SIMPLE
GRC
Greek
Greek
Greek
GREEK_ISO
GREEK_BGN
GREEK_ISO + GREEK_ISO +
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
KOR
Latin
Hangul
Hanja
KOREAN
KOREAN
KOREAN +
KOREAN +
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
ISR
Latin
Hebrew
Hebrew
HEBREW
HEBREW
HEBREW +
HEBREW +
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
ROM
Latin-3
Latin-3
Latin-3
Latin-3
Latin-3
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
POL
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
CZE
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
CRI
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
HUN
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
MDA
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
SVK
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
Latin-2
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
LAT
Latin-7
Latin-7
Latin-7
Latin-7
Latin-7
LATIN_SIMPLE LATIN
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
ASCII
extended
226
Stages Reference
Process Options
Table 83: Validate Address Global Process Options
Option
Description
Optimization level
Use this option to set the appropriate balance between processing speed and quality. One
of the following:
Narrow
The parser will honor input assignment strictly, with the exception of
separation of House Number from Street information.
Standard
The parser will separate address element more actively as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wide
Province will be separated from Locality information
PostalCode will be separated from Locality information
House Number will be separated from Street information
SubBuilding will be separated from Street information
DeliveryService will be separated from Street information
SubBuilding will be separated from Building information
Locality will be separated from PostalCode information
Parser separation will happen similarly to Standard, but additionally up to
10 parsing candidates will be passed to validation for processing. Validation
will widen its search tree and take additional reference data entries into
account for matching.
Please note that adjusting the optimization level might have no effect for countries that
lack the postal reference data information required for the kind of separation described
above.
Increasing separation granularity from Narrow to Standard consumes some processing
power, but the major impact on processing speed is from validation processing a larger
search tree, thus increasing the number of data accesses and comparisons for the
optimization level Wide, in an attempt to make the most out of the input data given.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
227
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Processing mode
Specifies the type of processing to perform on the addresses. One of the following:
Batch
Use this mode in batch processing environments when no human input
or selection is possible. It is optimized for speed and will terminate its
attempts to correct an address when ambiguous data is encountered
that cannot be corrected automatically. The Batch processing mode
will fall back to Parse mode when the database is missing for a specific
country.
Note: When the Process Status returns a value of I3, the
attempt is considered a failure and the Status will return a
value of F.
Certified
Use this mode in batch processing environments for Australian mail.
Validate Address Global is certified by Australia Post's Address Matching
Approval System (AMAS). It will standardize and validate your mail
against the Postal Address File, providing postal discounts and allowing
for the least amount of undeliverable pieces.
FastCompletion Use this mode if you want to use FastCompletion mode to enter
truncated data in address fields and have Validate Address Global
generate suggestions. For example, if you work in a call center or
point-of-sale environment, you can enter just part of an address element
and the FastCompletion feature will provide valid options for the
complete element.
Interactive
Use this mode when working in interactive environments to generate
suggestions when an address input is ambiguous. This validation type
is especially useful in data entry environments when capturing data
from customers or prospects. It requires the input of an almost-complete
address and will attempt to validate or correct the data provided. If
ambiguities are detected, this validation type will generate up to 20
suggestions that can be used for pick lists. The Interactive processing
mode will fall back to Parse mode when the respective database is
missing for a specific country.
Parse
Use this mode for separating address input into tokens for subsequent
processing in other systems, bypassing validation. For example, you
could use this mode when address data of already high quality simply
needs to be tokenized quickly for export to an external system or for
use by a downstream stage.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
228
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Matching scope
Specifies how closely an address must match the reference data in order for the address
to be validated. One of the following:
Note: These settings may not have an effect for countries lacking the necessary
level of detail in the postal reference data.
All levels
All address elements must match.
Delivery point level
Validate Global Address must achieve a match on StateProvince,
PostalCode, City/Locality/Suburb, street, house number, and
sub building.
Street level
Validate Global Address must achieve a match on StateProvince,
PostalCode, City/Locality/Suburb, and street.
Locality level
Validate Global Address must achieve a match on StateProvince,
PostalCode, and City/Locality/Suburb.
Output
Address Data
Table 84: Parsed Address Elements
Field Name
AddressBlock1-9
Description
The AddressBlock output fields contain a formatted version of the standardized or
normalized address as it would be printed on a physical mailpiece. Validate Address
Global formats the address into address blocks using postal authority standards.
Each line of the address is returned in a separate address block field. There can be
up to nine address block output fields: AddressBlock1 through AddressBlock9. For
example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
City: Lanham
StateProvince: MD
PostalCode: 20706
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
AddressBlock2: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
229
Stages Reference
Field Name
AddressLine1-6
Description
If the address was validated, the address line fields contain the validated and
standardized address lines. If the address could not be validated, the address line
fields contain the input address without any changes. Note that the last line of the
address is contained in the LastLine field. For example:
AddressLine1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
LastLine: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
AdministrativeDistrict
An area smaller than a state/province but larger than a city.
ApartmentLabel
The flat or unit type (such as STE or APT), for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
ApartmentNumber
The flat or unit number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
BlockName
An estate or block name.
BuildingName
The name of a building, for example Sears Tower.
City
The name of the town or city. For example, Vancouver, BC.
City.AddInfo
Additional information about the city.
City.SortingCode
A code used by the postal authority to speed up delivery in certain countries for
large localities, for example Prague or Dublin.
Contact
The name of the addressee. For example, Mr. Jones.
Country
The country in the language or code specified in the Country format option.
County
Dependent state or province information that further subdivides a state or province.
An example would be a U.S. county.
FirmName
The name of a company.
Floor
Information that further subdivides a building, e.g. the suite or apartment number.
For example: 123 E Main St Apt 3, 4th Floor
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
230
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
HouseNumber
The house number 1, for example: 298A-1B New South Head Rd
LastLine
Complete last address line (city, state/province, and postal code).
LeadingDirectional
Street directional that precedes the street name. For example, the N in 138 N Main
Street.
Locality
Dependent place name that further subdivides a Locality. Examples are colonias in
Mexico, Urbanisaciones in Spain.
POBox
Post Box descriptor (POBox, Postfach, Case Postale etc.) and number.
PostalCode
The postal code for the address. The format of the postcode varies by country.
PostalCode.AddOn
The second part of a postcode. For example, for Canadian addresses this will be
the LDU. For U.S. addresses this is the ZIP + 4 add on. This field is not used by
most countries.
PostalCode.Base
The base portion of the postcode.
Room
A room number in a building.
SecondaryStreet
The name of a secondary street or rural route.
StateProvince
The name of the state or province.
StreetName
The name of street where property is located, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
StreetSuffix
The street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
SubBuilding
A portion of a building, such as a suite. For example, Suite 102.
Suburb
Dependent place name that further subdivides a Locality. An example would be
Mahalle in Turkey.
Territory
The name of a territory. Territories are larger than a state/province.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
231
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
TrailingDirectional
The trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
Original Input Data
This option outputs the original input data in <FieldName>.Input fields.
Table 85: Original Input Data
Field Name
Format
AddressLine1.Input
String [79] First address line
AddressLine2.Input
String [79] Second address line
AddressLine3.Input
String [79] Third address line
AddressLine4.Input
String [79] Fourth address line
AddressLine5.Input
String [79] Fifth address line
AddressLine6.Input
String [79] Sixth address line
City.Input
String [79] City name
StateProvince.Input
String [79] State or province
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
Addressing Guide
232
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
PostalCode.Input
String [79]: The postal code for the address. In the U.S. this is the ZIP Code. One
of these formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Contact.Input
String [79] The name of the addressee. For example, "Mr. Jones".
Country.Input
String [79] Specify the country using the format you chose for input country format
(English name, ISO code, or UPU code). For a list of valid values, see
ISO Country Codes and Module Support.
FirmName.Input
String [79] The company or firm name.
Street.Input
String [79] Street
Number.Input
Building
[79]
Building.Input
String [79] Building
SubBuilding.Input
String [79] SubBuilding
DeliveryService.Input
String [79] DeliveryService
Number
Result Codes
These output fields contain information about the result of the validation processing.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
233
Stages Reference
Table 86: Result Codes
Field Name
AddressType
Confidence
CountOverflow
ElementInputStatus
ElementRelevance
Result Code
For United States and Canada addresses only, the AddressType field indicates the type
of address. One of the following:
F
The address was validated/corrected to the firm name.
B
The address was validated/corrected to the building name.
G
The address is a general delivery address.
H
The address was validated/corrected to the high-rise default.
L
The address is a large volume receiver.
M
The address is a military address.
P
The address was validated/corrected to PO box.
R
The address was validated/corrected to a rural route.
S
The address was validated/corrected to a street address.
U
The address could not be validated/corrected so the type is unknown.
The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range is from zero (0)
to 100; zero indicates failure, 100 indicates a very high level of confidence that the match
results are correct.
Indicates whether the number of candidate addresses exceeds the number returned. One
of the following:
Yes
Yes, there are additional candidate addresses. To obtain the additional
candidates, increase the Maximum number of results returned value.
No
No, there are no additional candidates.
ElementInputStatus provides per element information on the matching of input elements
to reference data. The values in this field vary depending on whether you are using batch
mode or parse mode. For information about the value in this field, see Interpreting
ElementInputStatus, ElementResultStatus, and ElementRelevance on page 239.
Indicates which address elements are actually relevant from the local postal authority's
point of view. For information about the value in this field, see Interpreting
ElementInputStatus, ElementResultStatus, and ElementRelevance on page 239.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
234
Stages Reference
Field Name
Result Code
ElementResultStatus
ElementResultStatus categorizes the result in more detail than the ProcessStatus field by
indicating if and how the output fields have been changed from the input fields. For
information about the value in this field, see Interpreting ElementInputStatus,
ElementResultStatus, and ElementRelevance on page 239.
MailabilityScore
An estimate of how likely it is that mail sent to the address would be successful delivered.
One of the following:
5
Completely confident of deliverability
4
Almost certainly deliverable
3
Should be deliverable
2
Fair chance
1
Risky
0
No chance
ModeUsed
Indicates the processing mode used. The processing mode is specified in the Processing
Mode option. For a description of the modes, see Process Options on page 227.
MultimatchCount
If the address was matched to multiple candidate addresses in the reference data, this
field contains the number of candidate matches found.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
235
Stages Reference
Field Name
Result Code
ProcessStatus
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
236
Stages Reference
Field Name
Result Code
Provides a general description of the output quality. For a more detailed description of the
output quality, see the ElementResultStatus field.
One of the following:
V4
Verified. The input data is correct. All elements were checked and input
matched perfectly.
V3
Verified. The input data is correct on input but some or all elements were
standardized or the input contains outdated names or exonyms.
V2
Verified. The input data is correct but some elements could not be verified
because of incomplete reference data.
V1
Verified. The input data is correct but the user standardization has
deteriorated deliverability (wrong element user standardization - for
example, postcode length chosen is too short). Not set by validation.
C4
Corrected. All elements have been checked.
C3
Corrected, but some elements could not be checked.
C2
Corrected, but delivery status unclear (lack of reference data).
C1
Corrected, but delivery status unclear because user standardization was
wrong. Not set by validation.
I4
Data could not be corrected completely, but is very likely to be deliverable.
Single match (e.g. HNO is wrong but only 1 HNO is found in reference
data).
I3
Data could not be corrected completely, but is very likely to be deliverable.
Multiple matches (e.g. HNO is wrong but more than 1 HNO is found in
reference data).
I2
Data could not be corrected, but there is a slim chance that the address
is deliverable.
I1
Data could not be corrected and is unlikely to be delivered.
RA
Country recognized from the Force country Setting
R9
Country recognized from DefaultCountryISO3 Setting
R8
Country recognized from name without errors
R7
Country recognized from name with errors
R6
Country recognized from territory
R5
Country recognized from province
R4
Country recognized from major town
R3
Country recognized from format
R2
Country recognized from script
R1
Country not recognized - multiple matches
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
237
Stages Reference
Field Name
Status
Result Code
R0
Country not recognized
S4
Parsed perfectly
S3
Parsed with multiple results
S2
Parsed with errors. Elements change position.
S1
Parse Error. Input Format Mismatch.
N1
Validation Error: No validation performed because country was not
recognized.
N2
Validation Error: No validation performed because required reference
database is not available.
N3
Validation Error: No validation performed because country could not be
unlocked.
N4
Validation Error: No validation performed because reference database is
corrupt or in wrong format.
N5
Validation Error: No validation performed because reference database is
too old.
N6
Validation Error: No validation performed because input data was
insufficient.
Q3
FastCompletion Status: Suggestions are available - complete address.
Q2
FastCompletion Status: Suggested address is complete but combined
with elements from the input (added or deleted).
Q1
FastCompletion Status: Suggested address is not complete (enter more
information).
Q0
FastCompletion Status: Insufficient information provided to generate
suggestions.
Reports the success or failure of the processing attempt.
null
Success
F
Failure
Status.Code
The reason for the failure, if there was one.
Status.Description
A description of the reason for the failure, if there was one.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
238
Stages Reference
Interpreting ElementInputStatus, ElementResultStatus, and ElementRelevance
The ElementInputStatus, ElementResultStatus, and ElementRelevance output fields contain a series
of digits that describe the outcome of the validation operation in detail. ElementInputStatus contains
some information for parsing operations.
This is what an ElementInputStatus value looks like:
44606040600000000060
This is what an ElementResultStatus value looks like:
88F0F870F00000000040
This is what an ElementRelevance value looks like:
11101010100000000000
To understand the values in these fields you need to know which element each position represents,
and the meaning of the values in each position. For example, the first digit indicates the result from
the PostalCode.Base output field. The position meanings are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position 1—PostalCode.Base
Position 2—PostalCode.AddOn
Position 3—City
Position 4—Locality and Suburb
Position 5—StateProvice
Position 6—County
Position 7—StreetName
Position 8—SecondaryStreet
Position 9—HouseNumber
Position 10—Number level 1
Position 11—POBox
Position 12—Delivery service level 1
Position 13—Building level 0
Position 14—BuildingName
Position 15—Sub building level 0
Position 16—Floor and Room
Position 17—FirmName
Position 18—Organization level 1
Position 19—Country
Position 20—Territory
For ElementInputStatus, the possible values for validation are:
• 0—Empty
• 1—Not found
• 2—Not checked (no reference data)
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
239
Stages Reference
• 3—Wrong - Set by validation only: The reference database suggests that either Number or
DeliveryService is out of valid number range. Input is copied, not corrected for batch mode, for
interactive mode and FastCompletion suggestions are provided.
• 4—Matched with errors in this element
• 5—Matched with changes (inserts and deletes) For example:
• Parsing: Splitting of house number for "MainSt 1"
• Validation: Replacing input that is an exonym or dropping superfluous fielded input that is invalid
according to the country reference database
• 6—Matched without errors
For ElementInputStatus, the possible values for parsing are:
•
•
•
•
0—Empty
1—Element had to be relocated
2—Matched but needed to be normalized
3—Matched
For ElementRelevance, the possible values for parsing are:
•
•
•
•
0—Empty
1—Element had to be relocated
2—Matched but needed to be normalized
3—Matched
For ElementResultStatus, the possible values are (for all address elements apart from country):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0—Empty
1—Not validated and not changed. Original is copied.
2—Not validated but standardized.
3—Validated but not changed due to invalid input, database suggests that number is out of valid
ranges. Input is copied, not corrected - this status value is only set in batch mode.
4—Validated but not changed due to lack of reference data.
5—Validated but not changed due to multiple matches. Only set in batch mode, otherwise multiple
suggestions that replace the input are marked as corrected (status value 7).
6—Validated and changed by eliminating the input value
7—Validated and changed due to correction based on reference data
8—Validated and changed by adding value based on reference data
9—Validated, not changed, but delivery status not clear (e.g. DPV value wrong; given number
ranges that only partially match reference data).
C—Validated, verified but changed due to outdated name
D—Validated, verified but changed from exonym to official name
E—Validated, verified but changed due to standardization based on casing or language. Validation
only sets this status if input fully matches a language alternative.
F—Validated, verified and not changed due to perfect match
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
240
Stages Reference
For Country (position 19 & 20), the following values are possible:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0—Empty
1—Country not recognized
4—Country recognized from DefaultCountryISO3 setting
5—Country not recognized - multiple matches
6—Country recognized from script
7—Country recognized from format
8—Country recognized from major town
9—Country recognized from province
C—Country recognized from territory
D—Country recognized from name with errors
E—Country recognized from name without errors
F—Country recognized from ForceCountryISO3 setting
Reports
Validate Address Global Summary Report
The Validate Address Global Summary Report lists summary statistics about the job, such as the
total number of records processed, the number of addresses validated, and more. For instructions
on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow Designer's Guide.
Job Summary
This section contains summary information about the job.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Started—The date and time that the job started.
Finished—The date and time that the job ended.
Processing time—The duration of the job.
Total Records—The total number of records presented to Validate Address Global for processing.
This may be different from the number of input records for the job depending on how the job is
designed.
Processed Records—The number of addresses that were successfully processed by Validate
Address Global. This is the total number of records less records not processed.
Default country—The default country specified in the Default country (ISO3 format) option.
Casing—The casing selected in the Casing option.
Script/Alphabet—The script specified in the Script/Alphabet option.
Countries—The number of countries represented in the input addresses.
Status Summary
This section lists the validation and correction results.
• Validated—Addresses that were correct on input.
• Corrected—Addresses that were corrected by Validate Address Global.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
241
Stages Reference
• Good deliverability—Addresses that could not be corrected but that are very likely to be
deliverable.
• Fair deliverability—Addresses that could not be corrected but have a fair chance that the address
is deliverable.
• Poor deliverability—Addresses that could not be corrected and are unlikely to be deliverable.
• Parsed—Addresses that were successfully parsed.
• Failed—Addresses that could not be verified, corrected, or parsed.
Validate Address Global Detail Report
The Validate Address Detail Report shows the results of validation/correction/parsing for each
country. For instructions on how to use reports, see the Spectrum™ Technology Platform Dataflow
Designer's Guide.
Status Details
This section lists the validation and correction results for each country.
• V (Validated)—Addresses that were correct on input.
• C (Corrected)—Addresses that were corrected by Validate Address Global.
• I4 (Good deliverability)—Addresses that could not be corrected but that are very likely to be
deliverable.
• I3 (Fair deliverability)—Addresses that could not be corrected but have a fair chance that the
address is deliverable.
• I2 (Poor deliverability)—Addresses that could not be corrected and are unlikely to be deliverable.
• S (Parsed)—Addresses that were successfully parsed.
• F (Failed)—Addresses that could not be verified, corrected, or parsed.
Validate Address Loqate
Validate Address Loqate standardizes and validates addresses using postal authority address data.
Validate Address Loqate can correct information and format the address using the format preferred
by the applicable postal authority. It also adds missing postal information, such as postal codes,
city names, state/province names, and so on.
Validate Address Loqate also returns result indicators about validation attempts, such as whether
or not Validate Address Loqate validated the address, the level of confidence in the returned address,
the reason for failure if the address could not be validated, and more.
During address matching and standardization, Validate Address Loqate separates address lines
into components and compares them to the contents of the Universal Addressing Module databases.
If a match is found, the input address is standardized to the database information. If no database
match is found, Validate Address Loqate optionally formats the input addresses. The formatting
process attempts to structure the address lines according to the conventions of the appropriate
postal authority.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
242
Stages Reference
Validate Address Loqate is part of the Universal Addressing Module.
Input
Validate Address Loqate takes an address as input. All addresses use this format regardless of
the address's country.
Table 87: Input Format
Field Name
Format
Description
AddressLine1
String
The first address line.
AddressLine2
String
The second address line.
AddressLine3
String
The third address line.
AddressLine4
String
The fourth address line.
City
String
The city name.
Country
String
The country code or name, in any of the following formats:
• Two-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2 country code
• Three-character ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3 country code
• English country name
See ISO Country Codes and Module Support for a list of ISO codes.
FirmName
String
The company or firm name.
PostalCode
String
The postal code for the address in one of these formats:
99999
99999-9999
A9A9A9
A9A 9A9
9999 999
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
243
Stages Reference
Field Name
Format
Description
StateProvince
String
The state or province.
Options
The following table lists the options that control the type of information returned by Validate Address
Loqate.
Table 88: Output Data Options
Option
Description
Database
Specifies which database you want to use for validating international
addresses. To specify a database for international address validation,
select a database in the Database drop-down list.
Include a standard address
Returns 1 to 4 lines of address data plus city, state, postal code, and
firm name. Each address line represents an actual line of the address
as it would appear on an envelope. For more information, see Output
on page 251.
If Validate Address Loqate could validate the address, the address
lines contain the standardized address. When addresses are
standardized, punctuation is removed, directionals are abbreviated,
street suffixes are abbreviated, and address elements are corrected.
If Validate Address Loqate could not validate the address, the address
lines contain the address as it appeared in the input ("pass through"
data). Non-validated addresses are always included as pass through
data in the address line fields even if you uncheck this option.
Include matched address elements
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Each part of the address, such as house number, street name, street
suffix, directionals, and so on is returned in a separate field. For more
information, see Parsed Address Elements Output on page 252. Note
that if you select this option and also select Return normalized data
when no match is found, the address elements will contain the input
address for addresses that could not be validated.
Addressing Guide
244
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Include standardized input address elements
This option returns the input address in parsed form regardless of
whether or not Validate Address Loqate is able to validate the address.
Each part of the input address, such as house number, street name,
street suffix, directionals, and so on is returned in a separate field.
Selecting this option differs from selecting the combination of Include
matched address elements/Return normalized data when no match
is found in that Return standardized input address elements returns
all input address in parsed form, not just input that could not be
validated. For more information, see Parsed Input on page 255.
Return geocoded address fields
Specifies whether to perform geocoding during processing. Geocoding
output provides the latitude and longitude for each input address, as
well as the level of accuracy of the match and the likely maximum
distance between the geocode and the actual physical location of the
address.
Include result codes for individual fields
Specifies whether to include field-level result indicators. Field-level
result indicators describe how Validate Address Loqate handled each
address element. Field-level result indicators are returned in the qualifier
"Result". For example, the field-level result indicator for HouseNumber
is contained in HouseNumber.Result. For a complete listing of result
indicator output fields, see Result Indicators on page 259.
Return normalized data when no match is found Specifies whether to return a formatted address when an address
cannot be validated. The address is formatted using the preferred
address format for the address's country. If this option is not selected,
the output address fields are blank when Validate Address Loqate
cannot validate the address.
Formatted addresses are returned using the format specified by the
Include a standard address, Include address line elements, and
Include postal information check boxes. Note that if you select
Include address line elements, the parsed address elements will
contain the parsed, validated address for addresses that could be
validated. If the address could not be validated the parsed address
elements will contain the input address in parsed form. If you always
want the output to contain the input address in parsed form, regardless
of whether or not Validate Address Loqate could validate the address,
select Include standardized input address elements.
If you check this option, you must select Include a standard address
and/or Include address line elements.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
245
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Return address data blocks
Specifies whether to return a formatted version of the address as it
would be printed on a physical mailpiece. Each line of the address is
returned in a separate address block field. There can be up to nine
address block output fields: AddressBlock1 through AddressBlock9.
For example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
City: Lanham
StateProvince: MD
PostalCode: 20706
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
AddressBlock2: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
AddressBlock3: UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Validate Address Loqate formats the address into address blocks using
postal authority standards. The country name is returned using the
Universal Postal Union country name. Note that the option Country
format does not affect the country name in the address block, it only
affects the name returned in the Country output field.
Format data using AMAS conventions
Specifies that output address data is to be formatted using Address
Matching Approval System (AMAS) conventions.
This option causes Validate Address Loqate to use AMAS rules when
standardizing an address. AMAS is an Australia Post program for
enforcing addressing standards. For more information on the AMAS
formatting conventions, refer to the Address Matching Approval System
(AMAS) Handbook.
This option modifies the output data as follows.
• Numeric fields are padded with zeros. This affects the following output
fields: HouseNumber, HouseNumber2, PostalDeliveryNumber, and
DPID. For example, if the input address is 298 New South Head Rd
Double Bay NSW 2028, then the format of the HouseNumber field
is changed from 298 to 00298.
• If a match is not made, then all digits in the DPID field will be zero.
For example, 00000000.
• If a match is not made, then all return fields (parsed address
elements) will be blank, except numeric fields which will contain all
zeros.
• The CCD field is not output.
Note: When this option is selected, results will be returned
with AMAS formatting regardless of selections made in the
Acceptance level and Minimum match score fields.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
246
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Casing
Specifies the casing of the output data. One of the following:
Mixed
Returns the output in mixed case (default). For
example:
123 Main St
Mytown FL 12345
Upper
Returns the output in upper case. For example:
123 MAIN ST
MYTOWN FL 12345
Default country
Specifies the default country. You should specify the country where
most of your addresses reside. For example, if most of the addresses
you process are in Germany, specify Germany. Validate Address Loqate
uses the country you specify to attempt validation when it cannot
determine the country from the StateProvince, PostalCode, and Country
address fields.
Country format
Specifies the format to use for the country name returned in the Country
output field. For example, if you select English, the country name
"Deutschland" would be returned as "Germany".
Script/Alphabet
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
English Names
Use English country names (default).
ISO Codes
Use two-letter ISO abbreviation for the countries
instead of country names.
UPU Codes
Use Universal Postal Union abbreviation for the
countries instead of country names.
Specifies the alphabet or script in which the output should be returned.
This option is bi-directional and generally takes place from Native to
Latin and Latin to Native.
Input Script
Do not perform transliteration and provide output
in the same script as the input (default).
Native
Output in the native script for the selected
country wherever possible.
Latin (English)
Use English values.
Addressing Guide
247
Stages Reference
Option
Acceptance level
Description
Specifies the minimum verification level a record must reach to be
considered successfully processed. The value in this field corresponds
to the second character of the Address Verification Code, which is
called "Post-Processed Verification Match Level":
• 5—Delivery point (building or post box). The record will be passed
or will have high confidence if ApartmentNumber, HouseNumber,
Street, City, and StateProvince supplied in the input record match to
the Loqate reference dataset. Will have moderate confidence if
ApartmentNumber is correct but other remaining fields are incorrect,
but in this case the Loqate engine should able to identify the
ApartmentNumber as ApartmentNumber is at a more granular level.
It will have zero confidence if ApartmentNumber and other fields are
unable to parsed by the Loqate engine.
• 4—Premise or building. The record will be passed or will have high
confidence if House Number, Street, City, and StateProvince supplied
in the input record match the Loqate reference dataset. Will have
moderate confidence if HouseNumber is correct but the other fields
are not; however, in this case the Loqate engine should able to identify
the HouseNumber because HouseNumber is at a more granular
level. It will have zero confidence if the HouseNumber and other fields
are unable to parsed by the Loqate engine.
• 3—Thoroughfare, road, or street. The record will be passed or will
have high confidence if Street, City, and StateProvince supplied in
the input record match the Loqate reference dataset. Will have
moderate confidence if City is correct but StateProvince is not;
however, in this case the Loqate engine should able to identify the
StateProvince as City itself is the part of StateProvince. It will have
zero confidence if City or both fields (City and State Province) are
unable to parsed by the Loqate engine.
• 2—Locality (city or town). The record will be passed or will have high
confidence if both City and StateProvince supplied in the input record
match the Loqate reference dataset. Will have moderate confidence
if City is correct but StateProvince is not; however, in this case the
Loqate Engine should able to identify the StateProvince as City itself
is the part of StateProvince. It will have zero confidence if City or both
fields (City and StateProvince) are unable to be parsed by the Loqate
engine.
• 1—Administrative area (state or region). The record will be passed
or will have high confidence if the StateProvince supplied in the input
record matches the Loqate reference dataset.
• 0—None. This is equivalent to loosest match option.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
248
Stages Reference
Option
Description
Duplicate handling
Enables the duplicate handling mask and specifies how duplicate
records are processed and removed. Select one or more of the following
options:
Single
Selected by default. Pre-process the input and
remove duplicates that occur in a single field.
Multi
Selected by default. Pre-process the input and
remove duplicates across all fields.
Non-standard Pre-process the input and remove duplicates in fields
that are not standard address fields.
Output
Selected by default. Post-process the output from
verification and remove duplicates from non-verified
fields.
Minimum match score
Specifies a numeric value between 0 and 100 that indicates the degree
to which Validate Address Loqate will change an address in order to
obtain a match in the Loqate reference database. The lower the number,
the greater amount of change is allowed. A value of 100 means that
after parsing the input address is nearly identical to the validated
address. A value of 0 means that the parsed input address may be
completely changed in order to obtain a validated address.
Return multiple addresses
Specifies whether or not to return multiple address for those input
addresses that have more than one possible match.
For more information, see Returning Multiple Matches on page 249.
Fail Multiple Matches
Fails multiple addresses for those input addresses that have more than
one possible match.
Returning Multiple Matches
If Validate Address Loqate finds multiple address in the postal database that are possible matches
for the input address, you can have Validate Address Loqate return the possible matches. For
example, the following address matches multiple addresses in the U.S. postal database:
PO BOX 1 New York, NY
Options
To return multiple matches, use the options described in the following table.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
249
Stages Reference
Table 89: Multiple Match Option
Option Name
Description/Valid Values
Return multiple addresses
Indicates whether or not to return multiple address for those input addresses that
have more than one possible match.
Maximum results
Next to the Return multiple addresses check box, enter a number between 1 and
10 that indicates the maximum number of addresses to return. The default value is
1.
Note: The difference between unchecking Return multiple addresses
and checking Return multiple addresses and specifying a maximum
number of results of 1 is that a multiple match will return a failure ifReturn
multiple addresses is unchecked, whereas a multiple match will return
one record ifReturn multiple addresses is checked and the maximum
number of results is 1.
Include result codes for individual
fields
To identify which output addresses are candidate addresses, you must check Include
result codes for individual fields on the Output Data tab. When you do this,
records that are candidate addresses will have one or more "M" values in the
field-level result indicators.
Output
When you choose to return multiple matches, the addresses are returned in the address format you
specify. For information on specifying address format, see Options on page 244. To identify which
records are the candidate addresses, look for multiple "M" values in the field-level result indicators.
For more informationResult Indicators on page 259, see .
Match Score Threshold Options
There are two options for setting match score thresholds.
Note: These options are not available in the Validate Address Loqate user interface; they
are located in the following file:
SpectrumDirectory/server/modules/loqate/env.properties
The MatchScoreAbsoluteThreshold option is used to specify the minimum match score a record
must reach to be considered a candidate for matching. The default value is 60, and the maximum
value is 100.
The MatchScoreThresholdFactor is a value that represents a factor of the highest matching result.
This value is used as a cutoff for considering result candidates. The higher the value of the factor,
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
250
Stages Reference
the higher the chance of getting a good verification result. The default value is 95 and the maximum
value is 100.
Output
The output from Validate Address Loqate contains various information depending on the output
categories you select.
Standard Address Output
Standard address output consists of four lines of the address which correspond to how the address
would appear on an address label. City, state/province, postal code, and other data is also included
in standard address output. Validate Address Loqate returns standard address output for validated
addresses if you select the Include a standard address check box. Standard address fields are
always returned for addresses that could not be validated regardless of whether or not you select
the Include a standard address check box. For non-validated addresses, the standard address
output fields contain the address as it appeared in the input ("pass through" data). If you want
Validate Address Loqate to standardize address according to postal authority standards when
validation fails, select the Include normalized data when no match is found check box.
Table 90: Standard Address Output
Field Name
Description
AdditionalInputData
Input data that could not be matched to a particular address component. For more
information, see About Additional Input Data.
AddressLine1-4
If the address was validated, the first line of the validated and standardized address.
If the address could not be validated, the first line of the input address without any
changes. There can be up to four address block output fields: AddressLine1 through
AddressLine4.
City
The validated city name.
Country
The country in the format determined by what you selected in Country format:
• ISO Code
• UPU Code
• English
FirmName
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
The validated firm or company name.
Addressing Guide
251
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
PostalCode
The validated ZIP Code™ or postal code.
PostalCode.AddOn
The 4-digit add-on part of the ZIP Code™. For example, in the ZIP Code™
60655-1844, 1844 is the 4-digit add-on.
PostalCode.Base
The 5-digit ZIP Code™; for example 20706.
StateProvince
The validated state or province abbreviation.
Parsed Address Elements Output
Output addresses are formatted in the parsed address format if you select the Include matched
address elements check box. If you want Validate Address Loqate to return formatted data in the
Parsed Address format when validation fails (that is, a normalized address), select the Return
normalized data when no match is found check box.
Note: If you want Validate Address Loqate to always return parsed input data regardless of
whether or not validation is successful, select Include standardized input address elements.
For more information, see Parsed Input on page 255.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
252
Stages Reference
Table 91: Parsed Address Output
Field Name
Description
AddressBlock1-9
The AddressBlock output fields contain a formatted version
of the standardized or normalized address as it would be
printed on a physical mailpiece. Validate Address Global
formats the address into address blocks using postal
authority standards. Each line of the address is returned in
a separate address block field. There can be up to nine
address block output fields: AddressBlock1 through
AddressBlock9. For example, this input address:
AddressLine1: 4200 Parliament Place
AddressLine2: Suite 600
City: Lanham
StateProvince: MD
PostalCode: 20706
Results in this address block output:
AddressBlock1: 4200 PARLIAMENT PL STE 600
AddressBlock2: LANHAM MD 20706-1882
ApartmentLabel
Apartment designator (such as STE or APT), for example:
123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentNumber
Apartment number, for example: 123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentNumber2
Secondary apartment number, for example: 123 E Main St
APT 3, 4th Floor
Note: In this release, this field will always be blank.
Building
Descriptive name identifying an individual location.
City
Validated city name
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
253
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Country
Country. Format is determined by what you selected in
Country format:
• ISO Code
• UPU Code
• English
County*
The smallest geographic data element within a country, for
instance, USA County
FirmName
The validated firm or company name
HouseNumber
House number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
LeadingDirectional
Leading directional, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
POBox
Post office box number. If the address is a rural route
address, the rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode
Validated postal code. For U.S. addresses, this is the ZIP
Code.
Principality *
The largest geographic data element within a country
StateProvince
Validated state or province name
StreetAlias
Alternate street name; typically applies only to a specific
range of addresses on the street. If you do not allow street
aliases in the output then the street's "base" name will
appear in the output regardless of whether or not there is
an alias for the street. for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
StreetName
Street name, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
254
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetSuffix
Street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
Subcity*
A smaller population center data element, dependent on
the contents of the Locality field. For instance, Turkish
Neighbourhood.
Substreet*
The dependent street or block data element within a country.
For instance, UK Dependent Street.
TrailingDirectional
Trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
*This is a subfield and may not contain data.
Parsed Input
The output can include the input address in parsed form. This type of output is referred to as "parsed
input." Parsed input fields contain the address data that was used as input regardless of whether
or not Validate Address validated the address. Parsed input is different from the "parsed address
elements" output in that parsed address elements contain the validated address if the address could
be validated, and, optionally, the input address if the address could not be validated. Parsed input
always contains the input address regardless of whether or not Validate Address validated the
address.
To include parsed input fields in the output, select the Return parsed input data check box.
Table 92: Parsed Input
Field Name
Description
ApartmentLabel.Input
Apartment designator (such as STE or APT), for example:
123 E Main St APT 3
ApartmentNumber.Input
Apartment number, for example: 123 E Main St APT 3
City.Input
Validated city name
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
255
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Country.Input
Country. Format is determined by what you selected in
Country format:
• ISO Code
• UPU Code
• English
County.Input*
The smallest geographic data element within a country, for
instance, USA County
FirmName.Input
The validated firm or company name
HouseNumber.Input
House number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
LeadingDirectional.Input
Leading directional, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
POBox.Input
Post office box number. If the address is a rural route
address, the rural route box number will appear here.
PostalCode.Input
Validated postal code. For U.S. addresses, this is the ZIP
Code.
Principality.Input *
The largest geographic data element within a country
StateProvince.Input
Validated state or province name
StreetAlias.Input
Alternate street name; typically applies only to a specific
range of addresses on the street. If you do not allow street
aliases in the output then the street's "base" name will
appear in the output regardless of whether or not there is
an alias for the street. The base name is the name that
applies to the entire street. For example: If StreetName is
“N MAIN ST” the StreetAlias field would contain “MAIN” and
the thoroughfare type,"ST", would be returned in the
StreetSuffix field.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
256
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
StreetName.Input
Street name, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
StreetSuffix.Input
Street suffix, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3
A smaller population center data element, dependent on
the contents of the Locality field. For instance, Turkish
Neighbourhood.
Subcity.Input*
Substreet.Input*
The dependent street or block data element within a country.
For instance, UK Dependent Street.
TrailingDirectional.Input
Trailing directional, for example: 123 Pennsylvania Ave NW
*This is a subfield and may not contain data.
Geocode Output
Validate Address Loqate returns the latitude/longitude, geocoding match code, dependent and
double dependent localities, dependent thoroughfare, subadministrative and superadministrative
areas, and the search distance as output. Match codes describe how well the geocoder matched
the input address to a known address; they also describe the overall status of a match attempt.
Search distance codes represent how close the geocode is to the actual physical location of an
address.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
257
Stages Reference
Table 93: Geocode Address Output
Field Name
Description
Geocode.MatchCode
This two-byte code reflects the status and level of geocode matching for an address.
The first byte represents the geocoding status and is one of the following:
A
Multiple candidate geocodes were found to match the input address, and
an average of these was returned
I
A geocode was able to be interpolated from the input addresses location
in a range
P
A single geocode was found matching the input address
U
A geocode was not able to be generated for the input address
The second byte represents the level of geocoding matching and is one of the
following:
5
Delivery point (post box or subbuilding)
4
Premise or building
3
Thoroughfare
2
Locality
1
Administrative area
0
None
Latitude
Eight-digit number in degrees and calculated to five decimal places (in the format
specified).
Longitude
Eight-digit number in degrees and calculated to five decimal places (in the format
specified).
SearchDistance
The radius of accuracy in meters, providing an indication of the probable maximum
distance between the given geocode and the actual physical location. This field is
derived from and dependent upon the accuracy and coverage of the underlying
reference data.
Table 94: City/Street/Postal Code Centroid Match Codes
Element
Match Code
Address Point
P4
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
258
Stages Reference
Element
Match Code
Address Point Interpolated
I4
Street Centroid
A4/P3
Postal Code/City Centroid
A3/P2/A2
Note: Geocode.Match.Code does not return two coordinates for a street segment (such as
the beginning and ending of a portion of a street). Instead, with input resulting in return codes
of I3 (interpolated to thoroughfare or street level, where no input premise number was
provided), the complete street is used in the computation.
Result Indicators
Result indicators provide information about the kinds of processing performed on an address. There
are two types of result indicators:
Record-Level Result Indicators
Record-level result indicators provide data about the results of Validate Address Loqate processing
for each record, such as the success or failure of the match attempt, which coder processed the
address, and other details. The following table lists the record-level result indicators returned by
Validate Address Loqate.
Table 95: Record Level Indicators
Field Name
Description
Confidence
The level of confidence assigned to the address being returned. Range is from zero
(0) to 100; zero indicates failure, 100 indicates a very high level of confidence that
the match results are correct. For multiple matches, the confidence level is 0. For
details about how this number is calculated, see Introduction to the Validate
Address Loqate Confidence Algorithm.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
259
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
CouldNotValidate
If no match was found, which address component could not be validated:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ApartmentNumber
HouseNumber
StreetName
PostalCode
City
Directional
StreetSuffix
Firm
POBoxNumber
Note: More than one component may be returned, in a comma-separated
list.
MatchScore
MatchScore provides an indication of the similarity between the input data and the
closest reference data match. It is significantly different from Confidence in that
Confidence indicates how much the input address changed to obtain a match,
whereas the meaning of Match Score varies between U.S. and non-U.S. addresses.
The int getFieldMatchscore (unit record, const char*) field is a decimal value between
0 and 100 that reflects the similarity between the identified input data and the closest
reference data match. A result of 100 indicates that no changes other than alias,
casing, or diacritic changes have been made to the input data. A result of 0 indicates
that there is no similarity between the input data and closest reference data match.
Note: The Validate Address Loqate and Advanced Matching Module
components both use the MatchScore field. The MatchScore field value in
the output of a dataflow is determined by the last stage to modify the value
before it is sent to an output stage. If you have a dataflow that contains
Validate Address Loqate and Advanced Matching Module components and
you want to see the MatchScore field output for each stage, use a
Transformer stage to copy the MatchScore value to another field. For
example, Validate Address Loqate produces an output field called
MatchScore and then a Transformer stage copies the MatchScore field
from Validate Address Loqate to a field called AddressMatchScore. When
the matcher stage runs it populates the MatchScore field with the value
from the matcher and passes through the AddressMatchScore value from
Validate Address Loqate.
ProcessedBy
Which address coder processed the address:
LOQATE
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
The Loqate coder processed the address.
260
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
Status
Reports the success or failure of the match attempt. For multiple matches, this field
is "F" for all the possible matches.
Status.Code
null
Success
F
Failure
Reason for failure, if there is one.
• UnableToValidate
Status.Description
Description of the problem, if there is one.
Address Not Found
This value will appear if
Status.Code=UnableToValidate.
Field-Level Result Indicators
Field-level result indicators describe how Validate Address Loqate handled each address element.
Field-level result indicators are returned in the qualifier "Result". For example, the field-level result
indicator for HouseNumber is contained in HouseNumber.Result.
To enable field-level result indicators, check the Include result codes for individual fields box.
The following table lists the field-level result indicators. If a particular field does not apply to an
address, the result indicator may be blank.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
261
Stages Reference
Table 96: Field-Level Result Indicators
Field Name
ApartmentLabel.Result
ApartmentNumber.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
R
The apartment label is required but is missing from the input address.
U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. U.S. addresses that are an EWS match will
have a value of P. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
R
The apartment number is required but is missing from the input address.
U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. Does not
apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
Addressing Guide
262
Stages Reference
Field Name
City.Result
Country.Result
County.Result*
FirmName.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Hyphens missing or punctuation errors. Canadian addresses only.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output.
R
The city is required but is missing from the input address. U.S. addresses
only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. Does
not apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
These result codes do not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
The smallest geographic data element within a country, for instance, USA County
C
Corrected. U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
U
Unmatched. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input. U.S. addresses only.
Addressing Guide
263
Stages Reference
Field Name
HouseNumber.Result
LeadingDirectional.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
O
Out of range. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. Canadian addresses only.
R
The house number is required but is missing from the input address.
Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. Does
not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. Non-blank input was corrected to a non-blank value. U.S.
addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it was
preserved in the output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
Addressing Guide
264
Stages Reference
Field Name
POBox.Result
PostalCode.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple matches. The input address matched multiple records in the
postal database, and each matching record has a different value in this
field. U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. Canadian addresses only.
R
The P.O. Box number is required but is missing from the input address.
U.S. addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it was
preserved in the output. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
R
The postal code is required but is missing from the input address. U.S.
addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. Does not
apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
U
Unmatched. For example, if the street name does not match the postal
code, both StreetName.Result and PostalCode.Result will contain U.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged from
input.
Addressing Guide
265
Stages Reference
Field Name
PostalCode.Type
Principality.Result *
StateProvince.Result
StreetAlias.Result
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Description
™
P
The ZIP Code contains only PO Box addresses. U.S. addresses
only.
U
The ZIP Code is a unique ZIP Code assigned to a specific company
or location. U.S. addresses only.
M
The ZIP Code is for military addresses. U.S. addresses only.
null
The ZIP Code is a standard ZIP Code .
™
™
™
™
™
The largest geographic data element within a country
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. addresses only.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
R
The state is required but is missing from the input address. U.S.
addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. Does not
apply to U.S. addresses.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
An alternate name for a street; typically applies only to a specific range of addresses
on the street. If you do not allow street aliases in the output then the street's "base"
name will appear in the output regardless of whether or not there is an alias for the
street. The base name is the name that applies to the entire street. For example: If
StreetName is “N MAIN ST” the StreetAlias field would contain “MAIN” and the
thoroughfare type,"ST", would be returned in the StreetSuffix field.
Addressing Guide
266
Stages Reference
Field Name
StreetName.Result
StreetSuffix.Result
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. Canadian addresses
only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations. U.S. and
Canadian addresses only.
U
Unmatched.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to U.S. addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
Subcity.Result*
A smaller population center data element, dependent on the contents of the Locality
field. For instance, Turkish Neighbourhood.
Substreet.Result*
The dependent street or block data element within a country. For instance, UK
Dependent Street.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
267
Stages Reference
Field Name
TrailingDirectional.Result
Description
A
Appended. The field was added to a blank input field. U.S. and Canadian
addresses only.
C
Corrected. U.S. and Canadian addresses only.
F
Formatted. The spacing and/or punctuation was changed to conform to
postal standards. Does not apply to U.S. or Canadian addresses.
M
Multiple. The input address matched multiple records in the postal
database, and each matching record has a different value in this field.
U.S. addresses only.
P
Pass-through. The data was not used in the validation process, but it
was preserved in the output. Canadian addresses only.
S
Standardized. This option includes any standard abbreviations.
U
Unmatched. Does not apply to Canadian addresses.
V
Validated. The data was confirmed correct and remained unchanged
from input.
*This is a subfield and may not contain data.
The AVC Code
The Address Verification Code (AVC) is an 11-byte code that is made up of accuracy indicators for
addresses; the codes tell you the quality of the processing results and provide guidelines on how
to correct the input data if necessary. Each individual address receives its own code. This code is
automatically returned within your dataflow's output. An example of an AVC is:
V44-I44-P6-100
AVCs consist of eight parts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verification Status
Post-Process Verification Match Level
Pre-Process Verification Match Level
Parsing Status
Lexicon Identification Match Level
Context Identification Match Level
Postcode Status
Matchscore
Verification Status
The level to which an address was verified.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
268
Stages Reference
• V—Verified. A complete match was made between the input data and a single record from the
available reference data. For simple address validation, this is considered the best code to return.
• P—Partially verified. A partial match was made between the input data and a single record from
the available reference data. This could mean that there is granular data for the address information
that was provided, but additional information is required to return a full validation.
• A—Ambiguous. There are multiple addresses that could match the input.
• U—Unable to verify. This gets returned when there is not enough information to verify an address
or when the input query is unreadable. The output fields will contain the input data.
• R—Reverted. The record could not be verified to the specified minimum acceptable level. This
occurs when advanced options such as minimum reversion levels are set on a process. The output
fields will contain the input data.
• C—Conflict. There is more than one close reference data match with conflicting values.
Post-Process Verification Match Level
The level to which the input data matches the available reference data after processing.
• 5—Delivery point (building or post box). The record will be passed or will have high confidence if
ApartmentNumber, HouseNumber, Street, City, and StateProvince supplied in the input record
match to the Loqate reference dataset. Will have moderate confidence if ApartmentNumber is
correct but other remaining fields are incorrect, but in this case the Loqate engine should able to
identify the ApartmentNumber as ApartmentNumber is at a more granular level. It will have zero
confidence if ApartmentNumber and other fields are unable to parsed by the Loqate engine.
• 4—Premise or building. The record will be passed or will have high confidence if House Number,
Street, City, and StateProvince supplied in the input record match the Loqate reference dataset.
Will have moderate confidence if HouseNumber is correct but the other fields are not; however,
in this case the Loqate engine should able to identify the HouseNumber because HouseNumber
is at a more granular level. It will have zero confidence if the HouseNumber and other fields are
unable to parsed by the Loqate engine.
• 3—Thoroughfare, road, or street. The record will be passed or will have high confidence if Street,
City, and StateProvince supplied in the input record match the Loqate reference dataset. Will have
moderate confidence if City is correct but StateProvince is not; however, in this case the Loqate
engine should able to identify the StateProvince as City itself is the part of StateProvince. It will
have zero confidence if City or both fields (City and State Province) are unable to parsed by the
Loqate engine.
• 2—Locality (city or town). The record will be passed or will have high confidence if both City and
StateProvince supplied in the input record match the Loqate reference dataset. Will have moderate
confidence if City is correct but StateProvince is not; however, in this case the Loqate Engine
should able to identify the StateProvince as City itself is the part of StateProvince. It will have zero
confidence if City or both fields (City and StateProvince) are unable to be parsed by the Loqate
engine.
• 1—Administrative area (state or region). The record will be passed or will have high confidence
if the StateProvince supplied in the input record matches the Loqate reference dataset.
• 0—None. This is equivalent to loosest match option.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
269
Stages Reference
Pre-Process Verification Match Level
The level to which the input data matches the available reference data before processing.
•
•
•
•
•
•
5—Delivery point (building or post box)
4—Premise or building.
3—Thoroughfare, road, or street.
2—Locality (city or town).
1—Administrative area (state or region).
0—None.
Parsing Status
The level to which an address was parsed.
• I—Identified and parsed. The input data has been identified and placed into components. For
example, with "123 Kingston Av" Validate Address Loqate would be able to determine that "123"
was a Premise Number, "Kingston" was the Thoroughfare Name, and "Av" or "Avenue" would be
the Thoroughfare Type.
• U—Unable to parse. Validate Address Loqate was unable to identify and parse the input data. As
with the "Unverified" verification status, the input data was incomplete or vague.
Lexicon Identification Match Level
The level to which the input data has some recognized form through the use of pattern matching
(for instance, a numeric value could be a premise number) and lexicon matching (for example, "rd"
could be Thoroughfare Type "road"; "London" could be a locality, and so on).
•
•
•
•
•
•
5—Delivery point (building or post box)
4—Premise or building.
3—Thoroughfare, road, or street.
2—Locality (city or town).
1—Administrative area (state or region).
0—None.
Context Identification Match Level
The level to which the input data can be recognized based on the context in which it appears. This
is the least accurate form of matching and is based on identifying a word as a particular address
element. For example, input could be determined to be a thoroughfare because it was preceded by
something that could be a premise and followed by something that could be a locality, the latter
items being identified through a match against the reference data or the lexicon.
•
•
•
•
•
5—Delivery point (building or post box)
4—Premise or building.
3—Thoroughfare, road, or street.
2—Locality (city or town).
1—Administrative area (state or region).
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
270
Stages Reference
• 0—None.
Postcode Status
The level to which a postal code was verified.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P8—PostalCodePrimary and PostalCodeSecondary verified.
P7—PostalCodePrimary verified, PostalCodeSecondary added or changed.
P6—PostalCodePrimary verified.
P5—PostalCodePrimary verified with small change.
P4—PostalCodePrimary verified with large change.
P3—PostalCodePrimary added.
P2—PostalCodePrimary identified by lexicon.
P1—PostalCodePrimary identified by context.
P0—PostalCodePrimary empty.
Match Score
A numeric value between 0 and 100 representing the similarity between the identified input data
and the output data for the record. A result of 100 means that no changes other than additions,alias,
casing, or diacritic changes have been made to the input data. A result of 0 means there is no
similarity between the input data item and the output data provided.
AMAS Output
The following table lists the standard fields that are output by Validate Address AUS.
Table 97: Output Fields
Field Name
Description
Barcode
Standard barcode based on the DPID.
DPID
F
Failure (no barcode found)
20-digit number
Success
The Delivery Point Identifier. An eight-digit number from the Australia Post Postal
Address File that uniquely identifies a mail delivery point, such as a street address.
Note: This field will contain "00000000" for Australian addresses that are
not AMAS-verified and will be empty for non-Australian addresses.
FloorNumber
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
The floor/level number, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3, 4th Floor
Addressing Guide
271
Stages Reference
Field Name
Description
FloorType
The floor/level type, for example: 123 E Main St Apt 3, 4th Floor
PostalBoxNum
The postal delivery number, for example: PO Box 42
Encountering False Positives
What is a False-Positive?
Link
To prevent the generation of address lists, the DPV and LACS
databases include false-positive
records. False-positive records are artificially manufactured addresses that reside in a false-positive
Link
table. For each negative response that occurs in a DPV or LACS
query, a query is made to the
false-positive table. A match to this table (called a false-positive match) disables your DPV or
Link
LACS
key. In batch processing the job that contains the violation will complete successfully but
Link
you will not be able to run any subsequent jobs that use DPV or LACS
until you report the violation
Link
and obtain a key to reactivate DPV or LACS .
Note: The term "seed record violation" is also used to refer to encountering false positive
records. The two terms mean the same thing.
Reporting DPV False-Positive Violations
Spectrum™ Technology Platform indicates a false-positive match via messages in the server log.
During batch processing, if you encounter a false positive record the job will continue. After the job
completes you will not be able to run any other jobs using DPV because your DPV key is disabled.
When a DPV false positive record violation occurs, the following text is displayed in the Execution
History:
DPV Seed Record Violation. Seed Code S<ZIP, ZIP+4, Address, Unit>
You can report the violation and obtain a restart key by following these steps.
1. In your browser, go to http://<yourserver>:<port>/<product code>/dpv.jsp. For example,
http://localhost:8080/unc/dpv.jsp for the Universal Addressing Module and
http://localhost:8080/geostan/dpv.jsp for the Enterprise Geocoding Module.
2. Enter the mailer's information into each field. The number in parentheses after each field name
indicates the maximum length of the field.
3. Click Submit when you're done. A File Download dialog will appear.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
272
Stages Reference
4. Click Save to save the file to your computer. A Save As dialog will appear.
5. Specify a file name and location on your local hard drive (for example c:\DPVSeedFile.txt)
and click Save.
6. Go to www.g1.com/support and log in.
Link
7. Click DPV & LACS
False Positive.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to attach your seed file and obtain a restart key.
DPV False Positive Header File Layout
The USPS® has determined the required layout of the DPV false-positive header file, which is
currently defined as a fixed-length file containing two or more 180-byte records. The first record
must always be the header record, whose layout is shown below.
Table 98: DPV False-Positive Header Record Layout
Position
Length
Description
Format
1-40
40
Mailer's company name
Alphanumeric
41-98
58
Mailer's address line
Alphanumeric
99-126
28
Mailer's city name
Alphanumeric
127-128
2
Mailer's state abbreviation
Alphabetic
129-137
9
Mailer's 9-digit ZIP Code
Numeric
138-146
9
Total Records Processed
Numeric
147-155
9
Total Records DPV Matched
Numeric
156-164
9
Percent Match Rate to DSF
Numeric
165-173
9
Percent Match Rate to ZIP + 4®
Numeric
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
273
Stages Reference
Position
Length
Description
Format
174-178
5
Number of ZIP Codes on file
Numeric
179-180
2
Number of False-Positives
Numeric
The trailer record contains information regarding the DPV false-positive match. There must be one
trailer record added to the false-positive file for every DPV false-positive match. The layout is shown
below.
Table 99: DPV False-Positive Trailer Record Layout
Position
Length
Description
Format
1-2
2
Street predirectional
Alphanumeric
3-30
28
Street name
Alphanumeric
31-34
4
Street suffix abbreviation
Alphanumeric
35-36
2
Street postdirectional
Alphanumeric
37-46
10
Address primary number
Alphanumeric
47-50
4
Address secondary abbreviation
Alphanumeric
51-58
8
Address secondary number
Numeric
59-63
5
Matched ZIP Code
Numeric
64-67
4
Matched ZIP + 4®
Numeric
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
274
Stages Reference
Position
Length
Description
Format
68-180
113
Filler
Spaces
Reporting LACS/Link False-Positive Violations
Spectrum™ Technology Platform indicates a false-positive match via messages in the server log.
Batch jobs will fail if a false-positive match occurs and client/server calls will throw an exception.
Note: The term "seed record violation" is also used to refer to encountering false positive
records. The two terms mean the same thing.
When a false positive record is encountered, the server log will say:
2005-05-19 09:40:10,758 WARN [com.g1.dcg.component.Log] Seed record
violation for RR 1
R74039 2924
2005-05-19 09:40:10,774 ERROR [com.g1.dcg.component.Log] Feature
Disabled: LLB: LACS Seed Record Violation. Seed Code: R74039 2924
2005-05-19 09:40:10,867 ERROR
[com.g1.dcg.job.server.stages.JobRunnerStages] Error executing job
com.g1.dcg.stage.StageException: com.g1.dcg.component.ComponentException:
Feature Disabled: LLB
1. In your browser, go to http://<ServerName>:<port>/<product code>/lacslink.jsp. For example,
http://localhost:8080/unc/lacslink.jsp for the Universal Addressing Module and
http://localhost:8080/geostan/lacslink.jsp for the Enterprise Geocoding Module.
2. Enter the mailer's information into each field. The number in parentheses after the field name
indicates the maximum length of the field. Click Submit when you're done. A File Download
dialog will appear.
3. Click Save to save the file to your computer. A Save As dialog will appear.
4. Specify a file name and location on your local hard drive (for example c:\lacslink.txt) and
click Save.
5. Go to www.g1.com/support and log in.
Link
6. Click DPV & LACS
False Positive.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to attach your seed file and obtain a restart key.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
275
Stages Reference
Validate Address Confidence Algorithm
Introduction to the Validate Address Confidence Algorithm
ValidateAddress computes a confidence score for each validated address. This score describes
how likely it is that the validated address is correct. Confidence code values range from 0 to 100,
with a zero confidence level indicating no confidence and 100 indicating a very high level of
confidence that the match results are correct. Confidence codes are calculated based on an algorithm
that takes into account the match results for individual output fields. The output fields involved in
this calculation include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Country
City
State
PostalCode
StreetName
HouseNumber
LeadingDirectional
TrailingDirectional
StreetSuffix
ApartmentNumber
Each field has its own Weight in the algorithm. Additionally, for each field the match result could be
labeled as Success, Failure, or Changed. ("Changed" refers to cases where the contents of the field
have been corrected in order to get a match.) The match result—Success, Failure, or
Changed—determines what the Factor is for that field. Thus, the calculation for the confidence code
is a product of Weight by Factor as follows:
Confidence = (Weight * Factor) for City
+ (Weight * Factor) for Country
+ (Weight * Factor) for State
+ (Weight * Factor) for PostalCode
+ (Weight * Factor) for StreetName
+ (Weight * Factor) for HouseNumber
+ (Weight * Factor) for Directionals
+ (Weight * Factor) for Street Suffix
+ (Weight * Factor) for ApartmentNumber
Confidence Algorithm for U.S. and Canadian Addresses
The following table details the scoring and logic behind the ValidateAddress confidence algorithm
for U.S. and Canadian addresses.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
276
Stages Reference
Table 100: Confidence Algorithm for U.S. and Canadian Addresses
1
2
Field
Weight/Match Score
Factor if Changed Factor If Filled
Country
10
100%
0%
City
10
50%
75%
State
15
50%
75%
PostalCode
15
25%
25%
StreetName
15
50%
75%
HouseNumber
15
50%
75%
Directionals
10
50%
75%
StreetSuffix
5
50%
75%
ApartmentNumber
5
50%
75%
Confidence Algorithm for International Addresses
There are two confidence algorithms for addresses outside the U.S. and Canada, one for addresses
in countries that use postal codes and one for addresses in countries that do not use postal codes.
The following table details the confidence algorithm for non-U.S. and non-Canadian addresses from
countries that use postal codes.
2
1
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is not present but is filled in order to achieve a
match.
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is changed in order to achieve a match.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
277
Stages Reference
Table 101: Confidence Algorithm for Countries With Postal Codes
4
3
5
Field
Weight/Match Score
Factor if
3
Changed
Factor If
4
Filled
Factor if Postal
Data
Unavailable
Country
11.1111111111111
100%
0%
0%
City
11.1111111111111
50%
75%
0%
State
16.6666666666667
100%
100
80%
PostalCode
16.6666666666667
100%
100%
80%
StreetName
16.6666666666667
50%
75%
50%
HouseNumber
16.6666666666667
50%
75%
50%
Directionals
0
50%
75%
0%
StreetSuffix
5.55555555555556
50%
75%
50%
ApartmentNumber
5.55555555555556
50%
75%
50%
5
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is not present but is filled in order to achieve a
match.
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is changed in order to achieve a match.
If the country is a Category C country, this value is 50%. Countries fall into one of these categories:
• Category A—Enables the validation and correction of an address's postal code, city name,
state/county name, street address elements, and country name.
• Category B—Enables the validation and correction of an address's postal code, city name,
state/county name, and country name. It does not support the validation or correction of street
address elements.
• Category C—Enables the validation and correction of the country name, and the validation of the
format of the postal code.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
278
Stages Reference
The following table details confidence algorithm for countries that do not use postal codes.
Table 102: Confidence Algorithm for Countries Without Postal Codes
7
6
8
Field
Weight/Match Score
Factor if
6
Changed
Factor If
7
Filled
Factor if Postal
Data
Unavailable
Country
13.3333333333333
100%
0%
0%
City
13.3333333333333
50%
75%
0%
State
20
100%
100
80%
StreetName
20
50%
75%
50%
HouseNumber
20
50%
75%
50%
Directionals
0
50%
75%
0%
StreetSuffix
6.66666666666667
50%
75%
50%
ApartmentNumber
6.66666666666667
50%
75%
50%
8
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is not present but is filled in order to achieve a
match.
Refers to instances when the input data in this field is changed in order to achieve a match.
If the country is a Category C country, this value is 50%. Countries fall into one of these categories:
• Category A—Enables the validation and correction of an address's postal code, city name,
state/county name, street address elements, and country name.
• Category B—Enables the validation and correction of an address's postal code, city name,
state/county name, and country name. It does not support the validation or correction of street
address elements.
• Category C—Enables the validation and correction of the country name, and the validation of the
format of the postal code.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
279
Stages Reference
The following table lists countries without postal codes.
Table 103: Countries Without Postal Codes
Afghanistan
Albania
Angola
Anguilla
Bahamas
Barbados
Belize
Benin
Bhutan
Botswana
Burkina Faso
Burundi
Cameroon
Cayman Islands
Central African Rep.
Chad
Cocos Islands
Colombia
Comoros
Congo (Dem. Rep.)
Congo (Rep.)
Cote d'Ivoire
Korea (North)
Djibouti
Dominica
Equatorial Guinea
Eritrea
Fiji
Gabon
Gambia
Ghana
Grenada
Guyana
Ireland
Jamaica
Kiribati
Libya
Malawi
Mali
Mauritania
Namibia
Nauru
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
280
Stages Reference
Palau
Panama
Peru
Qatar
Rwanda
Saint Lucia
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Samoa
Sao Tome and Principe
Seychelles
Sierra Leone
Suriname
Tanzania
Timor
Togo
Tonga
Trinidad & Tobago
Tuvalu
Uganda
United Arab Emirates
Vanuatu
Yemen
Zimbabwe
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
281
Appendix
In this section
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
283
A - ISO Country Codes
and Module Support
In this section
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
284
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
The table lists the two-digit and three-digit ISO codes for each country.
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Afghanistan
AF
AFG
Aland Islands
AX
ALA
Albania
AL
ALB
Algeria
DZ
DZA
American Samoa
AS
ASM
Andorra
AD
AND
Angola
AO
AGO
Anguilla
AI
AIA
Antarctica
AQ
ATA
Antigua And Barbuda
AG
ATG
Argentina
AR
ARG
Armenia
AM
ARM
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
284
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Aruba
AW
ABW
Australia
AU
AUS
Austria
AT
AUT
Azerbaijan
AZ
AZE
Bahamas
BS
BHS
Bahrain
BH
BHR
Bangladesh
BD
BGD
Barbados
BB
BRB
Belarus
BY
BLR
Belgium
BE
BEL
Belize
BZ
BLZ
Benin
BJ
BEN
Bermuda
BM
BMU
Bhutan
BT
BTN
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
285
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Bolivia, Plurinational State Of
BO
BOL
Bonaire, Saint Eustatius And Saba
BQ
BES
Bosnia And Herzegovina
BA
BIH
Botswana
BW
BWA
Bouvet Island
BV
BVT
Brazil
BR
BRA
British Indian Ocean Territory
IO
IOT
Brunei Darussalam
BN
BRN
Bulgaria
BG
BGR
Burkina Faso
BF
BFA
Burundi
BI
BDI
Cambodia
KH
KHM
Cameroon
CM
CMR
Canada
CA
CAN
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
286
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Cape Verde
CV
CPV
Cayman Islands
KY
CYM
Central African Republic
CF
CAF
Chad
TD
TCD
Chile
CL
CHL
China
CN
CHN
Christmas Island
CX
CXR
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
CC
CCK
Colombia
CO
COL
Comoros
KM
COM
Congo
CG
COG
Congo, The Democratic Republic Of The
CD
COD
Cook Islands
CK
COK
Costa Rica
CR
CRI
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
287
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Côte d'Ivoire
CI
CIV
Croatia
HR
HRV
Cuba
CU
CUB
Curacao
CW
CUW
Cyprus
CY
CYP
Czech Republic
CZ
CZE
Denmark
DK
DNK
Djibouti
DJ
DJI
Dominica
DM
DMA
Dominican Republic
DO
DOM
Ecuador
EC
ECU
Egypt
EG
EGY
El Salvador
SV
SLV
Equatorial Guinea
GQ
GNQ
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
288
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Eritrea
ER
ERI
Estonia
EE
EST
Ethiopia
ET
ETH
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
FK
FLK
Faroe Islands
FO
FRO
Fiji
FJ
FJI
Finland
FI
FIN
France
FR
FRA
French Guiana
GF
GUF
French Polynesia
PF
PYF
French Southern Territories
TF
ATF
Gabon
GA
GAB
Gambia
GM
GMB
Georgia
GE
GEO
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
289
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Germany
DE
DEU
Ghana
GH
GHA
Gibraltar
GI
GIB
Greece
GR
GRC
Greenland
GL
GRL
Grenada
GD
GRD
Guadeloupe
GP
GLP
Guam
GU
GUM
Guatemala
GT
GTM
Guernsey
GG
GGY
Guinea
GN
GIN
Guinea-Bissau
GW
GNB
Guyana
GY
GUY
Haiti
HT
HTI
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
290
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Heard Island and McDonald Islands
HM
HMD
Holy See (Vatican City State)
VA
VAT
Honduras
HN
HND
Hong Kong
HK
HKG
Hungary
HU
HUN
Iceland
IS
ISL
India
IN
IND
Indonesia
ID
IDN
Iran, Islamic Republic Of
IR
IRN
Iraq
IQ
IRQ
Ireland
IE
IRL
Isle Of Man
IM
IMN
Israel
IL
ISR
Italy
IT
ITA
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
291
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Jamaica
JM
JAM
Japan
JP
JPN
Jersey
JE
JEY
Jordan
JO
JOR
Kazakhstan
KZ
KAZ
Kenya
KE
KEN
Kiribati
KI
KIR
Korea, Democratic People's Republic Of
KP
PRK
Korea, Republic Of
KR
KOR
Kosovo
KS
KOS
Kuwait
KW
KWT
Kyrgyzstan
KG
KGZ
Lao People's Democratic Republic
LA
LAO
Latvia
LV
LVA
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
292
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Lebanon
LB
LBN
Lesotho
LS
LSO
Liberia
LR
LBR
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
LY
LBY
Liechtenstein
LI
LIE
Lithuania
LT
LTU
Luxembourg
LU
LUX
Macao
MO
MAC
Macedonia, Former Yugoslav Republic Of
MK
MKD
Madagascar
MG
MDG
Malawi
MW
MWI
Malaysia
MY
MYS
Maldives
MV
MDV
Mali
ML
MLI
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
293
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Malta
MT
MLT
Marshall Islands
MH
MHL
Martinique
MQ
MTQ
Mauritania
MR
MRT
Mauritius
MU
MUS
Mayotte
YT
MYT
Mexico
MX
MEX
Micronesia, Federated States Of
FM
FSM
Moldova, Republic Of
MD
MDA
Monaco
MC
MCO
Mongolia
MN
MNG
Montenegro
ME
MNE
Montserrat
MS
MSR
Morocco
MA
MAR
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
294
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Mozambique
MZ
MOZ
Myanmar
MM
MMR
Namibia
NA
NAM
Nauru
NR
NRU
Nepal
NP
NPL
Netherlands
NL
NLD
New Caledonia
NC
NCL
New Zealand
NZ
NZL
Nicaragua
NI
NIC
Niger
NE
NER
Nigeria
NG
NGA
Niue
NU
NIU
Norfolk Island
NF
NFK
Northern Mariana Islands
MP
MNP
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
295
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Norway
NO
NOR
Oman
OM
OMN
Pakistan
PK
PAK
Palau
PW
PLW
Palestinian Territory, Occupied
PS
PSE
Panama
PA
PAN
Papua New Guinea
PG
PNG
Paraguay
PY
PRY
Peru
PE
PER
Philippines
PH
PHL
Pitcairn
PN
PCN
Poland
PL
POL
Portugal
PT
PRT
Puerto Rico
PR
PRI
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
296
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Qatar
QA
QAT
Reunion
RE
REU
Romania
RO
ROU
Russian Federation
RU
RUS
Rwanda
RW
RWA
Saint Barthelemy
BL
BLM
Saint Helena, Ascension & Tristan Da Cunha
SH
SHE
Saint Kitts and Nevis
KN
KNA
Saint Lucia
LC
LCA
Saint Martin (French Part)
MF
MAF
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
PM
SPM
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
VC
VCT
Samoa
WS
WSM
San Marino
SM
SMR
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
297
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Sao Tome and Principe
ST
STP
Saudi Arabia
SA
SAU
Senegal
SN
SEN
Serbia
RS
SRB
Seychelles
SC
SYC
Sierra Leone
SL
SLE
Singapore
SG
SGP
Sint Maarten (Dutch Part)
SX
SXM
Slovakia
SK
SVK
Slovenia
SI
SVN
Solomon Islands
SB
SLB
Somalia
SO
SOM
South Africa
ZA
ZAF
South Georgia And The South Sandwich Islands
GS
SGS
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
298
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
South Sudan
SS
SSD
Spain
ES
ESP
Sri Lanka
LK
LKA
Sudan
SD
SDN
Suriname
SR
SUR
Svalbard And Jan Mayen
SJ
SJM
Swaziland
SZ
SWZ
Sweden
SE
SWE
Switzerland
CH
CHE
Syrian Arab Republic
SY
SYR
Taiwan, Province of China
TW
TWN
Tajikistan
TJ
TJK
Tanzania, United Republic Of
TZ
TZA
Thailand
TH
THA
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
299
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
Timor-Leste
TL
TLS
Togo
TG
TGO
Tokelau
TK
TKL
Tonga
TO
TON
Trinidad and Tobago
TT
TTO
Tunisia
TN
TUN
Turkey
TR
TUR
Turkmenistan
TM
TKM
Turks And Caicos Islands
TC
TCA
Tuvalu
TV
TUV
Uganda
UG
UGA
Ukraine
UA
UKR
United Arab Emirates
AE
ARE
United Kingdom
GB
GBR
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
300
ISO Country Codes and Module Support
ISO Country Name
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-2
ISO 3116-1 Alpha-3
United States
US
USA
United States Minor Outlying Islands
UM
UMI
Uruguay
UY
URY
Uzbekistan
UZ
UZB
Vanuatu
VU
VUT
Venezuela, Bolivarian Republic Of
VE
VEN
Viet Nam
VN
VNM
Virgin Islands, British
VG
VGB
Virgin Islands, U.S.
VI
VIR
Wallis and Futuna
WF
WLF
Western Sahara
EH
ESH
Yemen
YE
YEM
Zambia
ZM
ZMB
Zimbabwe
ZW
ZWE
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
301
Notices
Copyright
© 2018 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved. MapInfo and Group 1 Software are trademarks
of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All other marks and trademarks are property of their respective
holders.
USPS® Notices
Pitney Bowes Inc. holds a non-exclusive license to publish and sell ZIP + 4® databases on optical
and magnetic media. The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service:
Link
CASS, CASS Certified, DPV, eLOT, FASTforward, First-Class Mail, Intelligent Mail, LACS ,
Link
Link
NCOA , PAVE, PLANET Code, Postal Service, POSTNET, Post Office, RDI, Suite
, United
States Postal Service, Standard Mail, United States Post Office, USPS, ZIP Code, and ZIP + 4.
This list is not exhaustive of the trademarks belonging to the Postal Service.
Link®
Pitney Bowes Inc. is a non-exclusive licensee of USPS® for NCOA
processing.
Prices for Pitney Bowes Software's products, options, and services are not established, controlled,
or approved by USPS® or United States Government. When utilizing RDI™ data to determine
parcel-shipping costs, the business decision on which parcel delivery company to use is not made
by the USPS® or United States Government.
Data Provider and Related Notices
Data Products contained on this media and used within Pitney Bowes Software applications are
protected by various trademarks and by one or more of the following copyrights:
©
Copyright United States Postal Service. All rights reserved.
©
2014 TomTom. All rights reserved. TomTom and the TomTom logo are registered trademarks of
TomTom N.V.
©
2016 HERE
Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)
Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.
©
Copyright United States Census Bureau
©
Copyright Nova Marketing Group, Inc.
Portions of this program are © Copyright 1993-2007 by Nova Marketing Group Inc. All Rights
Reserved
©
Copyright Second Decimal, LLC
©
Copyright Canada Post Corporation
This CD-ROM contains data from a compilation in which Canada Post Corporation is the copyright
owner.
©
2007 Claritas, Inc.
The Geocode Address World data set contains data licensed from the GeoNames Project
(www.geonames.org) provided under the Creative Commons Attribution License ("Attribution
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
303
Copyright
License") located at http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/legalcode. Your use of the
GeoNames data (described in the Spectrum™ Technology Platform User Manual) is governed by
the terms of the Attribution License, and any conflict between your agreement with Pitney Bowes
Software, Inc. and the Attribution License will be resolved in favor of the Attribution License solely
as it relates to your use of the GeoNames data.
Spectrum™ Technology Platform 12.0 SP1
Addressing Guide
304
3001 Summer Street
Stamford CT 06926-0700
USA
www.pitneybowes.com
© 2018 Pitney Bowes Software Inc.
All rights reserved